Navigation

  • Page 1

    Common to Lathe System / Machining Center SystemOPERATOR'S MANUALB-64304EN/02FANUC Series 0+-MODEL DFANUC Series 0+ Mate-MODEL D

  • Page 2

    • No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. • All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. The products in this manual are controlled based on Japan’s “Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law”. The export from Japan may be subject to...

  • Page 3

    B-64304EN/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units. It is essential that these precautions be observed by users to ensure the safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit (all descriptions in this section assume...

  • Page 4

    SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-64304EN/02 WARNING 2 Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data. Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the use...

  • Page 5

    B-64304EN/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS NOTE Programs, parameters, and macro variables are stored in nonvolatile memory in the CNC unit. Usually, they are retained even if the power is turned off. Such data may be deleted inadvertently, however, or it may prove necessary to delete all data from nonvol...

  • Page 6

    SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-64304EN/02 WARNING 6 Stroke check After switching on the power, perform a manual reference position return as required. Stroke check is not possible before manual reference position return is performed. Note that when stroke check is disabled, an alarm is not issued even i...

  • Page 7

    B-64304EN/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS s-5 WARNING 2 Manual reference position return After switching on the power, perform manual reference position return as required. If the machine is operated without first performing manual reference position return, it may behave unexpectedly. Stroke check is ...

  • Page 8

    SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-64304EN/02 WARNING 10 Feed hold, override, and single block The feed hold, feedrate override, and single block functions can be disabled using custom macro system variables #3003 and #3004. Be careful when operating the machine in this case. 11 Dry run Usually, a dry run ...

  • Page 9

    B-64304EN/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS s-7 WARNING 2 Absolute pulse coder battery replacement When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on, and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is performed with the power on and the cabinet open, o...

  • Page 10

  • Page 11

    B-64304EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-1 TABLE OF CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS............................................................................s-1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ............................................. s-1 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS............................

  • Page 12

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64304EN/02 c-2 4.4 HELICAL INTERPOLATION (G02, G03) ..................................................... 41 4.5 CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION (G07.1) .................................................. 43 4.6 SKIP FUNCTION (G31).......................................................

  • Page 13

    B-64304EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-3 9.5 SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION (T SERIES) ................... 107 9.6 SPINDLE CONTROL WITH SERVO MOTOR ........................................... 110 9.6.1 Spindle Control with Servo Motor .................................................................

  • Page 14

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64304EN/02 c-4 14.7.7 Subprogram Call Using an M Code .....................................................................220 14.7.8 Subprogram Call Using an M Code (Specification of Multiple Definitions).......221 14.7.9 Subprogram Calls Using a T Code.........................

  • Page 15

    B-64304EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-5 1.2 TOOL MOVEMENT BY PROGRAMING - AUTOMATIC OPERATION ..... 306 1.3 AUTOMATIC OPERATION ....................................................................... 307 1.4 TESTING A PROGRAM ..............................................................................

  • Page 16

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64304EN/02 c-6 4.1 MEMORY OPERATION ............................................................................ 369 4.2 MDI OPERATION ...................................................................................... 371 4.3 DNC OPERATION....................................

  • Page 17

    B-64304EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-7 7.4.1 Return from the Alarm Screen .............................................................................441 7.4.2 Relationship with Other Functions (For 2-Path Control) .....................................442 8 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT ..........................

  • Page 18

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64304EN/02 c-8 10.2 INSERTING, ALTERING AND DELETING A WORD ................................ 488 10.2.1 Word Search .........................................................................................................489 10.2.2 Heading a Program..............................

  • Page 19

    B-64304EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-9 12.2.5 Next Block Display Screen ..................................................................................559 12.2.6 Program Check Screen .........................................................................................560 12.2.7 Current Block ...

  • Page 20

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64304EN/02 c-10 12.4.13.3 Operation history .......................................................................................... 662 12.4.13.4 Selecting operation history signals ............................................................... 670 12.4.13.5 Outputting al...

  • Page 21

    B-64304EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-11 APPENDIX A PARAMETERS....................................................................................765 A.1 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS........................................................... 765 A.2 DATA TYPE................................................

  • Page 22

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64304EN/02 c-12 K.2.1.1 Differences in Specifications ...................................................................... 1035 K.2.1.2 Differences in Diagnosis Display ............................................................... 1036 K.2.2 Automatic Tool Offset (T Serie...

  • Page 23

    B-64304EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-13 K.18.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1056 K.18.2 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1056 K.19 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETE...

  • Page 24

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64304EN/02 c-14 K.34.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1080 K.34.2 Differences in Diagnosis Display.......................................................................1081 K.35 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT.....

  • Page 25

    B-64304EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-15 K.50 CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (T SERIES)........................ 1108 K.50.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1108 K.50.2 Differences in Diagnosis Display.............................

  • Page 26

  • Page 27

    I. GENERAL

  • Page 28

  • Page 29

    B-64304EN/02 GENERAL 1.GENERAL - 3 - 1 GENERAL This manual consists of the following parts: About this manual I. GENERAL Describes chapter organization, applicable models, related manuals, and notes for reading this manual. II. PROGRAMMING Describes each function: Format used to program functi...

  • Page 30

    1.GENERAL GENERAL B-64304EN/02 NOTE 1 For explanatory purposes, these models may be classified as shown below: - T series: 0i -TD / 0i Mate -TD - M series: 0i -MD / 0i Mate -MD 2 Some functions described in this manual may not be applied to some products. For details, refer to the Descriptions (...

  • Page 31

    B-64304EN/02 GENERAL 1.GENERAL - 5 - Manual name Specification numberMAINTENANCE MANUAL B-64305EN PARAMETER MANUAL B-64310EN START-UP MANUAL B-64304EN-3 Programming Macro Compiler / Macro Executor PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-64303EN-2 Macro Compiler OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64304EN-5 C Language Executor P...

  • Page 32

    1.GENERAL GENERAL B-64304EN/02 - 6 - Manual name Specification numberFANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR βi series FANUC LINEAR MOTOR LiS series FANUC SYNCHRONOUS BUILT-IN SERVO MOTOR DiS series PARAMETER MANUAL B-65270EN FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi/βi series, BUILT-IN SPINDLE...

  • Page 33

    II. PROGRAMMING

  • Page 34

  • Page 35

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL 1 GENERAL Chapter 1, "GENERAL", consists of the following sections: 1.1 TOOL MOVEMENT ALONG WORKPIECE PARTS FIGURE-INTERPOLATION ....................... 35,9 1.2 FEED-FEED FUNCTION .........................................................................

  • Page 36

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - Tool movement along an arc • For milling machining WorkpieceTool ProgramG03 X_ Y_ R_ ; • For lathe cutting ProgramG02 X_ Z_ R_ ; or G03 X_ Z_ R_ ; WorkpieceZX Fig. 1.1 (b) Tool movement along an arc The term interpolation refers to an operation in whi...

  • Page 37

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL 1.2 FEED-FEED FUNCTION Movement of the tool at a specified speed for cutting a workpiece is called the feed. • For milling machining ToolWorkpieceTableFmm/min • For lathe cutting ToolWorkpieceChuck Fmm/min Fig. 1.2 (a) Feed function Feedrates can be speci...

  • Page 38

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 1.3 PART DRAWING AND TOOL MOVEMENT 1.3.1 Reference Position (Machine-specific Position) A CNC machine tool is provided with a fixed position. Normally, tool change and programming of absolute zero point as described later are performed at this position. This pos...

  • Page 39

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL 1.3.2 Coordinate System on Part Drawing and Coordinate System Specified by CNC - Coordinate System • For milling machining Z Y XPart drawingZYXCoordinate systemZYXToolWorkpieceMachine toolProgramCommandCNCTool • For lathe cutting Part drawing Machine toolP...

  • Page 40

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 Explanation - Coordinate system The following two coordinate systems are specified at different locations: (See II-7) 1 Coordinate system on part drawing The coordinate system is written on the part drawing. As the program data, the coordinate values on this c...

  • Page 41

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL The tool moves on the coordinate system specified by the CNC in accordance with the command program generated with respect to the coordinate system on the part drawing, and cuts a workpiece into a shape on the drawing. Therefore, in order to correctly cut the wo...

  • Page 42

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 T The following method is usually used to define two coordinate systems at the same location. 1 When coordinate zero point is set at chuck face WorkpieceX15040Z 6040Workpiece XZChuck - Coordinates and dimensions on part drawing- Coordinate system on lathe as s...

  • Page 43

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL 1.3.3 How to Indicate Command Dimensions for Moving the Tool (Absolute, Incremental Commands) Explanation Command for moving the tool can be indicated by absolute command or incremental command (See II-8.1). - Absolute command The tool moves to a point at &quo...

  • Page 44

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - Incremental command Specify the distance from the previous tool position to the next tool position. • For milling machining Y ZAX=40.0Z=-10.0 Y-30.0 X B G91 X40.0 Y-30.0 Z-10.0 ; Distance and direction for movement along each axis ToolCommand specifying m...

  • Page 45

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL - Diameter programming / radius programming Dimensions of the X axis can be set in diameter or in radius. Diameter programming or radius programming is employed independently in each machine. 1. Diameter programming In diameter programming, specify the diamet...

  • Page 46

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 <When a workpiece should be machined with a tool 100 mm in diameter at a cutting speed of 80 m/min.> The spindle speed is approximately 250 min-1, which is obtained from N=1000v/πD. Hence the following command is required: S250; Commands related to the s...

  • Page 47

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL T Tool numberTool post010602050403 Fig. 1.5 (b) Tool used for various machining <When No.01 is assigned to a roughing tool> When the tool is stored at location 01 of the tool post, the tool can be selected by specifying T0101. This is called the tool fu...

  • Page 48

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 1.7 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION A group of commands given to the CNC for operating the machine is called the program. By specifying the commands, the tool is moved along a straight line or an arc, or the spindle motor is turned on and off. In the program, specify the ...

  • Page 49

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 1.GENERAL - Program ; Oxxxx ; Program numberBlock Block Block : : : M30 ; End of program ::: Fig. 1.7 (c) Program configuration Normally, a program number is specified after the end-of-block (;) code at the beginning of the program, and a program end code (M02 or M30)...

  • Page 50

    1.GENERAL PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 24 - 1.8 TOOL MOVEMENT RANGE - STROKE Limit switches are installed at the ends of each axis on the machine to prevent tools from moving beyond the ends. The range in which tools can move is called the stroke. Stroke area MotorLimit switch Besides strok...

  • Page 51

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 2.CONTROLLED AXES - 25 - 2 CONTROLLED AXES Chapter 2, "CONTROLLED AXES", consists of the following sections: 2.1 NUMBER OF CONTROLLED AXES............................................................................................... 51,25 2.2 NAMES OF AXES ......

  • Page 52

    2.CONTROLLED AXES PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 26 - NOTE 1 The maximum number of available controlled axes is limited according to the option configuration. Refer to the manual provided by the machine tool builder for details. 2 The number of simultaneously controllable axes for manual operation (...

  • Page 53

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 2.CONTROLLED AXES - 27 - NOTE An increment (in millimeters or inches) in the table indicates a diameter value when diameter specification is performed (bit 3 (DIA) of parameter No. 1006 is 1) or a radius value when radius specification is performed (bit 3 (DIA) of parame...

  • Page 54

    PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 3. PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) 3 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) A number following address G determines the meaning of the command for the concerned block. G codes are divided into the following two types. Type Meaning One-shot G code The G code is effective o...

  • Page 55

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 3.PREPARATORY FUNCTION(G FUNCTION)M 7. The group of G60 (M series) is switched according to the setting of bit 0 (MDL) of parameter No. 5431. (When the MDL bit is set to 0, the 00 group is selected. When the MDL bit is set to 1, the 01 group is selected.) T 8. For G cod...

  • Page 56

    PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 3. PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) - 30 - Table 3.1 (a) G code list G code Group Function G45 Tool offset : increase G46 Tool offset : decrease G47 Tool offset : double increase G48 00 Tool offset : double decrease G49 08 Tool length compensation cancel G50 Scaling ca...

  • Page 57

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 3.PREPARATORY FUNCTION(G FUNCTION)- 31 - Table 3.1 (a) G code list G code Group Function G91.1 Checking the maximum incremental amount specified G92 Setting for workpiece coordinate system or clamp at maximum spindle speed G92.1 00 Workpiece coordinate system preset G93...

  • Page 58

    PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 3. PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) - 32 - Table 3.2 (a) G code list G code system A B C Group Function G32 G33 G33 Threading G34 G34 G34 Variable lead threading G36 G36 G36 Automatic tool offset (X axis) G37 G37 G37 Automatic tool offset (Z axis) G39 G39 G39 01 Tool n...

  • Page 59

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING - 33 - 3.PREPARATORY FUNCTION(G FUNCTION)Table 3.2 (a) G code list G code system A B C Group Function G80 G80 G80 Canned cycle cancel for drilling Electronic gear box : synchronization cancellation G81 G81 G81 Spot drilling (FS10/11-T format) Electronic gear box : synch...

  • Page 60

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 4 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS Interpolation functions specify the way to make an axis movement (in other words, a movement of the tool with respect to the workpiece or table). Chapter 4, "INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS", consists of the following...

  • Page 61

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS The rapid traverse rate in G00 command is set to the parameter No. 1420 for each axis independently by the machine tool builder. In the positioning mode actuated by G00, the tool is accelerated to a predetermined speed at the start of a block and...

  • Page 62

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 A calculation example is as follows. G91 G01 X20.0B40.0 F300.0 ; This changes the unit of the C axis from 40.0 deg to 40mm with metric input. The time required for distribution is calculated as follows: 300402022+(min)14907.0 The feedrate fo...

  • Page 63

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4.3 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02, G03) The command below will move a tool along a circular arc. Format Arc in the XpYp plane G02 I_ J_ G17 G03 Xp_ Yp_ R_ F_ ; Arc in the ZpXp plane G02 I_ K_G18 G03 Zp_ Xp_ R_ F_ ; Arc in the YpZp plane G02 J_ K_G...

  • Page 64

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - Distance moved on an arc The end point of an arc is specified by address Xp, Yp or Zp, and is expressed as an absolute or incremental value according to G90 or G91. For the incremental value, the distance of the end point which is viewed from ...

  • Page 65

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS r=50mm End point Start point r=50mm<1><2>For arc <1> (less than 180°) G91 G02 X60.0 Y55.0 R50.0 F300.0 ; For arc <2> (greater than 180°) G91 G02 X60.0 Y55.0 R-50.0 F300.0 ; YX - Feedrate The feedrate in circular...

  • Page 66

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 γe γ(t) γs Start point Center End pointθ(t) θ Start point End point Center θ θ γs γe Radius θts)e(s(t))(θγγγγ−+= The arc radius changes linearly with the center angle θ(t). Spiral interpolation is performed using a circular com...

  • Page 67

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS T - Command of circular interpolation X, Z Start pointXZ-axisX-axisCenter of arcEnd pointZKXZ-axisX-axis(Diameterprogramming)KZStart pointXZ-axisX-axisCenter of arcEnd pointZR(Diameterprogramming)(Absolute programming)(Absolute programming)(Abso...

  • Page 68

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 Explanation A tangential velocity of an arc in a specified plane or a tangential velocity about the linear axis can be specified as the feedrate, depending on the setting of bit 5 (HTG) of parameter No.1403. An F command specifies a feedrate alon...

  • Page 69

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4.5 CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION (G07.1) In cylindrical interpolation function, the amount of movement of a rotary axis specified by angle is converted to the amount of movement on the circumference to allow linear interpolation and circular interp...

  • Page 70

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - Tool radius/tool nose radius compensation To perform tool radius/tool nose radius compensation in the cylindrical interpolation mode, cancel any ongoing tool radius/tool nose radius compensation mode before entering the cylindrical interpolati...

  • Page 71

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - Tool offset A tool offset must be specified before the cylindrical interpolation mode is set. No offset can be changed in the cylindrical interpolation mode. M - Coordinate system setting In the cylindrical interpolation mode, a workpiece c...

  • Page 72

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 Example ZC R C2301901500 mm Z deg110 90 70 120 30 60 70 270N05 N06 N07 N08 N09N10N11N12N13 36060 Example of a Cylindrical Interpolation O0001 (CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION ); N01 G00 G90 Z100.0 C0 ; N02 G01 G91 G18 Z0 C0 ; N03 G07.1 C57299 ;* N04 G...

  • Page 73

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS #5065 : Fifth axis coordinate value CAUTION Disable feedrate override, dry run, and automatic acceleration/deceleration (however, these become available by setting bit 7 (SKF) of parameter No.6200 to 1.) when the feedrate per minute is speci...

  • Page 74

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - The next block to G31 is an absolute programming for 2 axes 100200300Actual motionMotion without skip signalSkip signal is input here(300,100)YX100G31 G90 X200.0 F100;X300.0 Y100.0; Fig. 4.6 (c) The next block is an absolute programming for 2...

  • Page 75

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS CAUTION Dwell is not skipped when Qn is not specified and bits 0 (DS1) and 7 (DS8) parameter No.6206 are not set. 4.8 HIGH-SPEED SKIP SIGNAL (G31) The skip function operates based on a high-speed skip signal (connected directly to the NC; not ...

  • Page 76

    4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - Conditions for performing a skip operation Command Condition G31P98 G31P99 The torque limit value is reached. A skip operation is performed. A skip operation is performed. A skip signal is input. No skip operation is performed. A skip operatio...

  • Page 77

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4.INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS - 51 - : G31 P99 X200. F100. ; (Torque limit skip command) : G01 X100. F500. ; (Move command with the torque limit being still effective) : Myy ; (Cancel the torque limit from the PMC) : M30 ; - Positional deviation limit during the torque limi...

  • Page 78

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 52 - 5 FEED FUNCTIONS Chapter 5, "FEED FUNCTIONS", consists of the following sections: 5.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................................................... 78,52 ...

  • Page 79

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS Rapid traverse rate FR : Rapid traverse rate TR : Acceleration/ deceleration time constant for rapid traverse rate 0Time0 Feedrate FR TR TRFC TC TCFC : Feedrate TC : Acceleration/ deceleration time constant for a cutting feedrate Time Fig. 5.1 (a) Autom...

  • Page 80

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 5.2 RAPID TRAVERSE Format G00 IP_ ; G00 : G code (group 01) for positioning (rapid traverse) IP_ : Dimension word for the end point Explanation The positioning command (G00) positions the tool by rapid traverse. In rapid traverse, the next block is exe...

  • Page 81

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS Format M Feed per minute G94 ; G code (group 05) for feed per minute F_ ; Feedrate command (mm/min or inch/min) Feed per revolution G95 ; G code (group 05) for feed per revolution F_ ; Feedrate command (mm/rev or inch/rev) Inverse time feed (G93) G93 ; In...

  • Page 82

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 M At power-on, the feed per minute mode is set. T Either the feed per minute mode or the feed per revolution mode is selected during power-on is determined by bit 4 (FPM) of parameter No. 3402. An override from 0% to 254% (in 1% steps) can be applied t...

  • Page 83

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS • For milling machining FFeed amount per spindlerevolution (mm/rev or inch/rev) • For lathe cutting Feed amount per spindle revolution(mm/rev or inch/rev)F Fig. 5.3 (c) Feed per revolution CAUTION When the speed of the spindle is low, feedrate flu...

  • Page 84

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 NOTE 1 In the inverse time specification mode, an F code is not handled as a modal code and therefore needs to be specified in each block. If an F code is not specified, alarm PS0011 (FEED ZERO (COMMAND)) is issued. 2 When F0 is specified in inverse time...

  • Page 85

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS M - One-digit F code feed When a one-digit number from 1 to 9 is specified after F, the feedrate set for that number in a parameter Nos. 1451 to 1459 is used. When F0 is specified, the rapid traverse rate is applied. The feedrate corresponding to the nu...

  • Page 86

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 NOTE 1 The purpose of in-position check is to check that the servo motor has reached within a specified range (specified with a parameter by the machine tool builder). In-position check is not performed when bit 5 (NCI) of parameter No. 1601 is set to 1....

  • Page 87

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS 5.4.2.1 Automatic override for inner corners (G62) M Explanation - Override condition When G62 is specified, and the tool path with tool radius compensation applied forms an inner corner, the feedrate is automatically overridden at both ends of the corn...

  • Page 88

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 Programmed path The feedrate is overridden from point a to b.Tool center path Fig. 5.4.2(c) Override Range (Arc to Arc) Regarding program (2) of an arc, the feedrate is overridden from point a to point b and from point c to point d (Fig. 5.4.2(d)). c d...

  • Page 89

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS RpRcF= Rc : Tool center path radius Rp : Programmed radius It is also valid for the dry run and the one-digit F code feed command. RcRpProgrammed Tool center path Fig. 5.4.2(e) Internal circular cutting feedrate change If Rc is much smaller than Rp, Rc...

  • Page 90

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 Program example N1G91G01X10.F10.; N2C10.F10.; It instructs in a instruction feedrate of a rotary axis at a feedrate of a rotary axis. Instruction speed (deg/min) XY N2N1C Feedrate of liner axis(X axis) ()minmmXLXFF/Δ×= Feedrate of rotary axis(C axis...

  • Page 91

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS Cutting feedrate is clamped based on the maximum cutting feedrate parameter (No.1430) and feedrate of an actual axis (data before this function is converted). Therefore, it is possible to instruct at feedrate more than setting the maximum cutting feedrate...

  • Page 92

    5.FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 Therefore, the movement time becomes about 37.700(sec), and the rotation feedrate becomes about 15.915(deg/min). The feedrate on 36.000mm in an imaginary radius becomes 10.000mm/min at instruction feedrate in Fig.5.5(a). 10mm36mmInstruction feedrate F=10...

  • Page 93

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5.FEED FUNCTIONS - 67 - 5.6 DWELL Format M G04 X_; or G04 P_; X_ : Specify a time or spindle speed (decimal point permitted) P_ : Specify a time or spindle speed (decimal point not permitted) T G04 X_ ; or G04 U_ ; or G04 P_ ; X_ : Specify a time or spindle speed (decima...

  • Page 94

    6.REFERENCE POSITION PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 6 REFERENCE POSITION A CNC machine tool has a special position where, generally, the tool is exchanged or the coordinate system is set, as described later. This position is referred to as a reference position. Chapter 6, "REFERENCE POSITION"...

  • Page 95

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 6.REFERENCE POSITION A (Start position for reference position return) C (Destination of return from the reference position) R (Reference position) Automatic reference position return (G28) A → B → R Movement from the reference position (G29) R → B → C B (Intermedi...

  • Page 96

    6.REFERENCE POSITION PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 Explanation - Automatic reference position return (G28) Positioning to the intermediate or reference positions are performed at the rapid traverse rate of each axis. Therefore, for safety, the compensation functions, such as the cutter compensation, ...

  • Page 97

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 6.REFERENCE POSITION - 71 - - Setting of the reference position return feedrate Before a coordinate system is established with the first reference position return after power-on, the manual and automatic reference position return feedrates and automatic rapid traverse ra...

  • Page 98

    6.REFERENCE POSITION PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 72 - - When automatic reference position return (G28) is executed if no reference position is established When automatic reference position return (G28) is executed if no reference position is established, movement from the intermediate position in...

  • Page 99

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM 7 COORDINATE SYSTEM By teaching the CNC a desired tool position, the tool can be moved to the position. Such a tool position is represented by coordinates in a coordinate system. Coordinates are specified using program axes. When three program axes, th...

  • Page 100

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 Format G53 IP_ (P1) ; IP_: Absolute dimension word P1: Enables the high-speed G53 function. Explanation - Selecting a machine coordinate system (G53) When a command is specified the position on a machine coordinate system, the tool moves to the pos...

  • Page 101

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM Reference - Setting a machine coordinate system When manual reference position return is performed after power-on, a machine coordinate system is set so that the reference position is at the coordinate values of (α, β) set using parameter No.1240. ...

  • Page 102

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 T G50 IP_ ; Explanation A workpiece coordinate system is set so that a point on the tool, such as the tool tip, is at specified coordinates. M If a coordinate system is set using G92 during tool length offset, a coordinate system in which the positio...

  • Page 103

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM T (Example 1)Setting the coordinate system by the G50X128.7Z375.1;command (Diameter designation) (The tool nose is thestart point for the program.)(Example 2)Setting the coordinate system by the G50X1200.0Z700.0;command (Diameter designation) (The base...

  • Page 104

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 By specifying a G code from G54 to G59, one of the workpiece coordinate systems 1 to 6 can be selected. G54 : Workpiece coordinate system 1 G55 : Workpiece coordinate system 2 G56 : Workpiece coordinate system 3 G57 : Workpiece coordinate system 4 G58...

  • Page 105

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM Workpiece coordinate system 1(G54) Workpiece coordinate system 2 (G55) Workpiece coordinate system 3 (G56) Workpiece coordinate system 4 (G57) Workpiece coordinate system 5 (G58) Workpiece coordinate system 6 (G59) ZOFS2 ZOFS3 ZOFS4 ZOFS5 ZOFS1 ZOFS...

  • Page 106

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 T If IP is an incremental command value, the workpiece coordinate system is defined so that the current tool position coincides with the result of adding the specified incremental value to the coordinates of the previous tool position. (Coordinate sy...

  • Page 107

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM Example T XX'Tool positionA160100100100200If G50X100Z100; is commanded when the tool ispositioned at (200, 160) in G54 mode, workpiececoordinate system 1 (X' - Z') shifted by vector A iscreated.New workpiece coordinate systemOriginal workpiece coordin...

  • Page 108

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 Format M G92.1 IP 0 ; IP 0 : Specifies axis addresses subject to the workpiece coordinate system preset operation. Axes that are not specified are not subject to the preset operation. T G50.3 IP 0 ; (G92.1 IP 0; for G code system B or C) IP 0 : Spec...

  • Page 109

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM WZn-Machine zero pointWorkpiece originoffset valueWZoG54 workpiececoordinate system beforemanual interventionG54 workpiece coordinatesystem after manualinterventionPoPnAmount ofmovement duringmanual intervention In the operation above, a workpiece coo...

  • Page 110

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 Format - Selecting the additional workpiece coordinate systems G54.1 Pn ; or G54 Pn ; Pn : Codes specifying the additional workpiece coordinate systems n : 1 to 48 - Setting the workpiece origin offset value in the additional workpiece coordinate s...

  • Page 111

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM 7.2.6 Automatic Coordinate System Setting When the workpiece coordinate system is not used (bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136 is 1), if bit 0 (ZPR) of automatic coordinate system setting parameter No. 1201 is 1, a manual reference position return opera...

  • Page 112

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 Format - Changing the workpiece coordinate system shift amount G10 P0 IP_; IP : Settings of an axis address and a workpiece coordinate system shift amount CAUTION A single block can contain a combination of X, Y, Z, C, U, V, W, and H (in G code sys...

  • Page 113

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM 7.3 LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM When a program is created in a workpiece coordinate system, a child workpiece coordinate system can be set for easier programming. Such a child coordinate system is referred to as a local coordinate system. Format G52 IP_;...

  • Page 114

    7.COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 CAUTION 3 Whether the local coordinate system is canceled at reset depends on the parameter setting. The local coordinate system is canceled when either bit 3 (RLC) of parameter No.1202 is set to 1. The local coordinate system is canceled regardless...

  • Page 115

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 7.COORDINATE SYSTEM - 89 - G17 U_ Y_ ; UY plane G18 X_ Z_ ; ZX plane X_Y_ ; Plane is unchanged (ZX plane) G17 ; XY plane G18 ; ZX plane G17 U_ ; UY plane G18 Y_ ; ZX plane, Y axis moves regardless without any relation to the plane.

  • Page 116

    8.COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 8 COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION Chapter 8, "COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION", consists of the following sections: 8.1 ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING ................................................................. 116,90 ...

  • Page 117

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 8.COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION Example M Absolute programming Incremental programming G90 X40.0 Y70.0 ; G91 X-60.0 Y40.0 ; YX70.0 30.0 40.0100.0End point Start point T Tool movement from point P to point Q (diameter programming is used for the X-axis) G code system A...

  • Page 118

    8.COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 8.2 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION (G20, G21) Either inch or metric input (least input increment) can be selected by G code. Format Inch input Metric input This G code must be specified in an independent block before setting the coordinate syste...

  • Page 119

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 8.COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION - 93 - In addition, if the workpiece coordinate system has been shifted, using the following commands or operations, bit 1 (CIM) of parameter No. 11222 can be used to select whether to issue alarm PS1298 or to clear the offset. • Manual ...

  • Page 120

    8.COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 94 - • Workpiece coordinate system shift caused by local coordinate system setting (G52) or workpiece coordinate system setting If an axis is under any of the following controls, however, no automatic coordinate system conversion base...

  • Page 121

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 8.COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION 8.3 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING Numerical values can be entered with a decimal point. A decimal point can be used when entering a distance, time, or speed. Decimal points can be specified with the following addresses: M X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A,...

  • Page 122

    8.COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 96 - NOTE 1 A specified value less than the least increment is treated as shown below (rounded off to the right side). Example 1) When a value is specified directly at an address (in the case of IS-B) X-0.0004 ; Treated as X0.000 X0....

  • Page 123

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 8.COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION - 97 - 8.4 DIAMETER AND RADIUS PROGRAMMING Since the workpiece cross section is usually circular in CNC lathe control programming, its dimensions can be specified in two ways : Diameter and Radius Z axisABD1X axisD2R1R2D1, D2 : Diameter pr...

  • Page 124

    PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) - 98 - 9 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) The spindle speed can be controlled by specifying a value following address S. Chapter 9, "SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION)", consists of the following sections: 9.1 SPECIF...

  • Page 125

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION) - Constant surface speed controlled axis command G96 Pα ; P0 : Axis set in the parameter (No. 3770) P1 : X axis, P2 : Y axis, P3 : Z axis, P4 : 4th axis P5 : 5th axis T NOTE If multi-spindle control (spindle selecting based on addr...

  • Page 126

    PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) The spindle speed (min-1) almost coincideswith the surface speed (m/min) at approx.160 mm (radius).Spindle speed (min-1)Relation between workpiece radius,spindle speed and surface speedRadius (mm)Surface speed S is 600 m/min. Fig. 9...

  • Page 127

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION) - Surface speed specified in the G96 mode G96 modeG97 modeSpecify the surface speed in m/min(or feet/min)G97 commandStore the surface speed in m/min(or feet/min)Command forthe spindlespeedSpecifiedThe specifiedspindle speed(min-1) is ...

  • Page 128

    PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) Example T 1000300 400 500 600 700 800 900110012001300 1400150010501475200 375 500 300 400 700 X Z1234N16N16N15 N15 N14N14N11N11100 675 600 Programmed pathTool path after offsetRadius value φ600 φ400 N8 G00 X1000.0 Z1400.0 ; N9...

  • Page 129

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION) Place the spindle in the spindle positioning mode and establish a reference position by specifying a given M code (set with a parameter). (Spindle orientation) 2. Positioning the spindle in the spindle positioning mode The spindle i...

  • Page 130

    PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) - Program reference position The position at which orientation is completed is assumed to be a program reference position. However, the program reference position can be changed through coordinate system setting (G92 or G50) or au...

  • Page 131

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION)The direction of rotation can be specified with bit 1 (IDM) of parameter No. 4950. Absolute and incremental commands can be used for positioning with an arbitrary angle. With absolute commands for positioning with an arbitrary angle, w...

  • Page 132

    PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) - 106 - CAUTION 2 Dry run and machine lock cannot be performed during spindle positioning. 3 Auxiliary function lock is disabled for M codes for the spindle positioning function. 4 Both serial spindle Cs contour control function (b...

  • Page 133

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION) 9.5 SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION (T SERIES) T Overview With this function, an overheat alarm (OH0704) is raised and the spindle speed fluctuation detection alarm signal SPAL is issued when the spindle speed deviates from the s...

  • Page 134

    PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) The parameters (No. 4914, No. 4911, No. 4912, and No. 4913) for the spindle on which the currently selected position coder is mounted are used for the setting and spindle speed fluctuation detection check. - Spindle fluctuation de...

  • Page 135

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION)Spindle speed Specified speed Actual speed Time AlarmStart of checkSpecification of another speed CHECKNO CHECKCHECK SqSqSiSiSrSrG26 modeP (Example 2) When an alarm OH0704 is issued before a specified spindle speed is reached Spindle...

  • Page 136

    PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) - 110 - If the difference between the specified speed and actual speed exceeds both Sr and Si, an alarm OH0704 is raised. - Relationship between spindle speed control and each spindle Serial spindle SpindleFunction 1st spindle 2nd...

  • Page 137

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION)- 111 - Threading, feed per rotation feed, and constant surface speed control can be performed using a servo motor spindle as a spindle. (6) Spindle output control with PMC The rotation speed and polarity can be controlled by PMC. -...

  • Page 138

    PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) - 112 - - Command with a signal SV speed control mode signal <Gn521> can also be used to start and cancel the SV speed control mode. The SV speed control mode is started or canceled on a rising or falling edge of the SV spee...

  • Page 139

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION)- 113 - Explanation - Command (1) Spindle speed command output Set up the spindle speed command in the same way as for the ordinary speed command (S command). Before specifying a speed command (S command), start the SV speed control...

  • Page 140

    PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) When using an absolute position detector, manual reference position return is not required. If reference position return (G28) is performed in a program when position control is disabled (bit 0 (PCE) of parameter No. 11006 is 0), a...

  • Page 141

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION)SV reverse signal ON Rotation speed (min-1) -S0 Time (sec) S1 S AaAbAc-S1 -S S0 AbAcAa0 - Display Bit 3 (NDF) of parameter No. 3115 can be used to specify whether to display the actual speed. This, however, is not considered in the ...

  • Page 142

    PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) - 116 - 9.6.2 Spindle Indexing Function Format G96.1 P_ R_ ; After spindle indexing is completed, the operation of the next block is started. G96.2 P_ R_ ; Before spindle indexing is completed, the operation of the next block is sta...

  • Page 143

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION)- 117 - - SV speed control mode cancellation If G96.1 is used to perform spindle indexing, the SV speed control mode is canceled when spindle indexing is completed. If G96.2 is used to perform spindle indexing, G96.3 can be used to ch...

  • Page 144

    PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) Rotation speed (min-1) S0 Time (s) S1 S AaAbAcSi Aa S1 : Parameter No. 11020 setting (acceleration/deceleration is switched at a rotation speed of S1 (min-1).) S0 : Parameter No. 11021 setting (acceleration/deceleration is switched...

  • Page 145

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION)- 119 - Spindle indexing operation Using bit 0 (SIC) of parameter No. 11005 can select which coordinate system, absolute or machine, is to be used in spindle indexing. Example: If the difference between the machine and absolute coor...

  • Page 146

    PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) NOTE Before rigid tapping can be specified, the SV speed control mode for the servo motor spindle must be canceled. If rotation is in progress, use G96.1/G96.2 to cancel the SV speed control mode. The mode of the servo motor spin...

  • Page 147

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION(S FUNCTION)Example: Parameter settings are: Time constant (TC) = 800 msec and speed (S) = 4000 min-1 min-14000msec 800800 - Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation In this type of rigid tapping, when advanced preview control can be use...

  • Page 148

    PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 122 - 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) From the separate detector connected to the spindle, the rate of feed per revolution is obtained. When the detector built into the servo motor is to be used, the feedrate is obtained based on the servo motor speed and gear ...

  • Page 149

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) 10 TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) Chapter 10, "TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION)", consists of the following sections: 10.1 TOOL SELECTION FUNCTION .................................................................................................

  • Page 150

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 NOTE 1 The maximum number of digits of a T code can be specified by parameter (No.3032) as 1 to 8. 2 When parameter (No.5028) is set to 0, the number of digits used to specify the offset number in a T code depends on the number of tool offset...

  • Page 151

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) T A group is selected, tool compensation is specified, and tool life counting is started only by a T code. (turret type) - Maximum number of tool life management groups and 2-path system A maximum of 128 tool life management groups can be u...

  • Page 152

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - Codes for specifying a tool offset value M Codes for specifying a tool offset value include an H code (for tool length offset) and a D code (for cutter compensation). Numbers up to 400 (up to three digits long) can be registered as code...

  • Page 153

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) M Format Meaning G10 L3 ; P- L- ; T- H- D- ; T- H- D- ; : P- L- ; T- H- D- ; T- H- D- ; : G11 ; M02(M30) ; G10L3: Register data after deleting data of all groups. P-: Group number L-: Tool life value T-: Tool number H-: Code for specif...

  • Page 154

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 T Format Meaning G10 L3 P- ; ; 30) ; G10L3P1: Start changing group data. d tool offset number 1 ; P- L- ; T- ; T- ; : P- LT- ; T- ; : G11M02(MP-: Group number L-: Tool life value T-: Tool number anG11: End of registration Deletion...

  • Page 155

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) Table 10.2.2 (b) Life value unit and maximum value in L command LFB (No.6805#4) FGL (No.6805#1) Life value unitMaximum value in L command Example 0 1 minute 4300 L100: Life value is 100 minutes. 0 1 0.1 second 2580000 L1000: Life value is 10...

  • Page 156

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 D00; Cancels cutter compensation. NOTE H99 and D99 must be specified after the M06 command. If a code other than the H/D code set in H99/D99 or parameters Nos. 13265 and 13266 is specified after M06, the H code or D code of tool life ...

  • Page 157

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 131 - If the condition that a new tool be selected is not met, and the second or subsequent selection of the same group is made since the entry of the control unit into the automatic operation start state from the reset state, the next to t...

  • Page 158

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 NOTE Offset start and cancel operations involve compensation by moving a tool or by shifting the coordinate system. Using bit 6 (LWM) of parameter No. 5002 can select whether to perform a compensation operation if a T code is specified or i...

  • Page 159

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) - 133 - Example: Suppose that the tool life management ignore number is 100. T101 ; : M06 T102 ; : : : M06 T103 ; : : : G43 H99 ; : G41 D99 ; : D00 ; : H00 ; : M06 T104 ; : : A tool whose life has not expired is selected from group 1. (Suppo...

  • Page 160

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 T Example: Suppose that offset numbers are two digits long. T0199 ; : : : : : : T0188 ; : : : : T0299 ; : : : : : T0299 ; : : : : : : T0301 ; : : A tool whose life has not expired is selected from group 1. (Suppose that T1001 is selected. T...

  • Page 161

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) for the first time since the entry of the control unit into the automatic operation start state from the reset state. CAUTION No matter how many times the same tool group number is specified in a program, the use count is not incremented...

  • Page 162

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 136 - NOTE 2 If tool life counting indicates that the life of the last tool in a group has expired, the tool change signal is output. If the life count type is duration specification, the signal is output as soon as the life of the last to...

  • Page 163

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) Example: Suppose that M16 is a tool life count restart M code and that the tool life management ignore number is 100. Also suppose that the life count is specified by use count. T101 ; A tool whose life has not expired is selected from g...

  • Page 164

    10.TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 138 - 10.2.6 Disabling Life Count Explanation If bit 6 (LFI) of parameter No. 6804 is 1, the tool life count disable signal LFCIV can be used to select whether to cancel the tool life count. If the tool life count disable signal LFCIV is 1...

  • Page 165

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION - 139 - 11 AUXILIARY FUNCTION Overview There are two types of auxiliary functions: the auxiliary function (M codes), which specifies the start and end of the spindle or the end of a program, and the second auxiliary function (B codes), which specifie...

  • Page 166

    11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 140 - - M98 (Calling of subprogram) This code is used to call a subprogram. The code and strobe signals are not sent. See the subprogram II-13.3 for details. - M99 (End of subprogram) This code indicates the end of a subprogram. M99 execution re...

  • Page 167

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION - 141 - 11.3 SECOND AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS (B CODES) Overview If a value with a maximum of eight digits is specified after address B, the code signal and strobe signal are transferred for calculation of the rotation axis. The code signal is retained u...

  • Page 168

    11.AUXILIARY FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 142 - B10 10000 (When metric input is used and the reference axis is IS-B. The magnification is 1000.) When the second auxiliary function with a decimal point is specified, the specified value multiplied by a magnification is output to the code ...

  • Page 169

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - 143 - 12 PROGRAM MANAGEMENT Chapter 12, "PROGRAM MANAGEMENT", consists of the following sections: 12.1 PROGRAM ATTRIBUTES.............................................................................................................. 169,1...

  • Page 170

    12.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 144 - 12.3 PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE / NUMBER OF REGISTERABLE PROGRAMS The following table lists the combinations of program storage sizes and the total number of registrable programs. 0i-D 0i Mate-D Part program storage size Number of registerabl...

  • Page 171

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION 13 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION Overview - Main program and subprogram There are two program types, main program and subprogram. Normally, the CNC operates according to the main program. However, when a command calling a subprogram is encountered in t...

  • Page 172

    13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 Program code start%TITLE;O0001 ;M30 ;%(COMMENT)Program sectionLeader sectionProgram startComment sectionProgram code end Fig. 13 (b) Program configuration - Program section configuration A program section consists of several blocks. A program s...

  • Page 173

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION - 147 - Explanation - Program code start The program code start indicates the start of a file that contains NC programs. The mark is not required when programs are entered using ordinary personal computers. The mark is not displayed on the screen...

  • Page 174

    13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 CAUTION If a long comment section appears in the middle of a program section, a move along an axis may be suspended for a long time because of such a comment section. So a comment section should be placed where movement suspension may occur or n...

  • Page 175

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION - 149 - If a five-digit sequence number is used, the lower four digits are registered as a program number. If the lower four digits are all 0, the program number registered immediately before added to 1 is registered as a program number. Note, ho...

  • Page 176

    13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 Table 13.2 (b) Major functions and addresses Function Address Meaning Program number O(*) Program number Sequence number N Sequence number Preparatory function G Specifies a motion mode (linear, arc, etc.) X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C Coordinate axi...

  • Page 177

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION - 151 - Function Address Input in mm Input in inch Increment system IS-A ±999999.99 mm ±999999.99 deg ±99999.999 inch(*2) ±999999.99 deg Increment system IS-B ±999999.999 mm ±999999.999 deg ±99999.9999 inch(*2) ±999999.999 deg Dimensio...

  • Page 178

    13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 152 - Input signal Start code to be ignored BDT3 /3 BDT4 /4 BDT5 /5 BDT6 /6 BDT7 /7 BDT8 /8 BDT9 /9 NOTE 1 Number 1 for /1 can be omitted. However, when two or more optional block skips are specified for one block, number 1 for /1 cannot be om...

  • Page 179

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION BDT3 "1""0"Read by CNC → . . . ; /1 /3 /5 N123 X100. Y200. ; N234 . . . .This range of information is ignored. NOTE 1 This function is not used when a program is registered in memory. A block containing / is register...

  • Page 180

    13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 Format - Subprogram configuration One subprogram Subprogram number (or the colon (:) optionally in the case of ISO) Program end M99 need not constitute a separate block as indicated below. Example) X100.0 Y100.0 M99 ; Oxxxx ; : M99; - Sub...

  • Page 181

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION A single call command can repeatedly call a subprogram up to 99999999 times. For compatibility with automatic programming systems, in the first block, Nxxxxx can be used instead of a subprogram number that follows O (or :). A sequence number after...

  • Page 182

    13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 If the optional block skip function is set to on, the /M99 ; block is skipped ; control is passed to the next block for continued execution. If/M99Pn ; is specified, control returns not to the start of the main program, but to sequence number n. I...

  • Page 183

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 13.PROGRAM CONFIGURATION - 157 - O0001 ; N0010…; N0020 M98 (P0001) Q0050 ;N0030…; N0040…; N0050…; N0060…; N0070…M99; For a call within the same program, specification of Pxxxx in a block can be omitted when the block includes M98. This function is usable o...

  • Page 184

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 14 CUSTOM MACRO Although subprograms are useful for repeating the same operation, the custom macro function also allows use of variables, arithmetic and logic operations, and conditional branches for easy development of general programs such as pocketing a...

  • Page 185

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO - 159 - - Range of variable values Local and common variables can have a value in the following ranges. If the result of calculation exceeds the range, an alarm PS0111 is issued. When bit 0 (F0C) of parameter No.6008 = 0 Maximum value: approx. ±10308 ...

  • Page 186

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 160 - - Referencing variables The value following an address can be replaced with a variable. When programming as <address>#i or <address>-#i, the variable value or the complement of it is used as the specified value of the address. [Exampl...

  • Page 187

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO - 161 - (c) Comparison <null> differs from 0 only for EQ and NE. <null> is equal to 0 for GE, GT, LE, and LT. • When <null> is assigned to #1 Conditional expression #1 EQ #0 #1 NE 0 #1 GE #0 #1 GT 0 #1 LE #0 #1 LT 0 Evaluation result...

  • Page 188

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 162 - - Specifying a common variable by its name Specifying a variable name set by the SETVN command described later allows reading from or writing to a common variable. The command must be specified in the form [#common-variable-name] such as [#VAR500]...

  • Page 189

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO - Interface signals System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #1000-#1031 [#_UI[n]] R Interface input signals (BIT), UI000-UI031 NOTE) Subscript n represents a BIT position (0-31). #1032-#1035 [#_UIL[n]] R Interface input signals (L...

  • Page 190

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 164 - System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #2201-#2400 Tool compensation value (H code, wear) Note)Subscript n represents a compensation number (1 to 200).#11001-#11400 [#_OFSHW[n]] R/W The numbers on the left are also allowe...

  • Page 191

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO - 165 - System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #2101-#2164 #11001-#11200 [#_OFSZW[n]] R/W Z-axis compensation value(wear)(※1) Note)Subscript n represents a compensation number (1 to 64). The numbers on the left are also a...

  • Page 192

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 166 - System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #3003 [#_CNTL1] R/W Enable or disable the suppression of single block stop. Enable or disable the waiting of the auxiliary function completion signal. #3003 bit0 [#_M_SBK] R/W Ena...

  • Page 193

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO - 167 - System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #4107 [#_BUFD] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last minute (D code) #4108 [#_BUFE] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last min...

  • Page 194

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 T System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #4001-#4030 [#_BUFG[n]] R Modal information on blocks that have been specified by last minute (G code) Note)Subscript n represents a G code group number. #4108 [#_BUFE] R Modal in...

  • Page 195

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO - 169 - System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #5041-#5045 [#_ABSOT[n]] R Specified current position (workpiece coordinate system) Note) Subscript n represents an axis number (1 to 5). #5061-#5065 [#_ABSKP[n]] R Skip positio...

  • Page 196

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - Workpiece origin offset value, extended workpiece origin offset value M System variable number System variable name AttributeDescription #5201-#5205 [#_WZCMN[n]] R/W External workpiece origin offset value Note)Subscript n represents an axis number (...

  • Page 197

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO - 171 - - System constant System constant number System constant name AttributeDescription #0,#3100 [#_EMPTY] R Null #3101 [#_PI] R Circular constant π = 3.14159265358979323846 #3102 [#_E] R Base of natural logarithm e = 2.71828182845904523536 ...

  • Page 198

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 Variable value Input signal 1.0 Contact closed 0.0 Contact opened Since the read value is 1.0 or 0.0 regardless of the unit system, the unit system must be considered when a macro is created. The input signals at 32 points can be read at a time by readin...

  • Page 199

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO - 173 - Variable number Variable name Point Interface input signal #1130 [#_UO[30]] 1 UO030 (230) #1131 [#_UO[31]] 1 UO031 (231) #1132 [#_UOL[0]] 32 UO000-UO031 #1133 [#_UOL[1]] 32 UO100-UO131 #1134 [#_UOL[2]] 32 UO200-UO231 #1135 [#_UOL[3]] 32 UO300-UO3...

  • Page 200

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 <1> Address switching signed BCD 3 digits are read. Macro calling instruction G65 P9100 D (address); A custom macro body is created as follows. O9100 ; #1132 = #1132 AND 496 OR #7 ; : Address sending G65 P9101 T60 ; : Timer macro #100 = BIN[#1...

  • Page 201

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO - 175 - • When the number of compensations is 400 (For compensation with a compensation number of 200 or less, #2001 to #2200 can also be used.) Compensation number Variable number Variable name 1 #10001 [#_OFS[1]] 2 #10002 [#_OFS[2]] : : : 399 #10399 [#...

  • Page 202

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 When bit 3 (V10) of parameter No.6000 = 0 H code Geometry Wear Compensation number Variable numberVariable name Variable number Variable name 1 #11001 [#_OFSHG[1]] #10001 [#_OFSHW[1]] 2 #11002 [#_OFSHG[2]] #10002 [#_OFSHW[2]] : : : : : 399 #11399 [#_OFSH...

  • Page 203

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO - 177 - Compensation number Variable numberVariable name Description 1 #2101 [#_OFSZ[1]] 2 #2102 [#_OFSZ[2]] : : : 63 #2163 [#_OFSZ[63]] 64 #2164 [#_OFSZ[64]] Z-axis compensation value (*1) 1 #2201 [#_OFSR[1]] 2 #2202 [#_OFSR[2]] : : : 63 #2263 [#_OFSR[63]...

  • Page 204

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 178 - <2> With tool geometry/wear compensation memory (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No.8136 = 0) • When the number of compensations is 64 or less Compensation number Variable numberVariable name Description 1 #2001 [#_OFSXW[1]] 2 #2002 [#_OFSXW[2]]...

  • Page 205

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO • When the number of compensations is 200 (For compensation with a compensation number of 64 or less, #2001 to #2964 can also be used.) Compensation number Variable numberVariable name Description 1 #10001 [#_OFSXW[1]] 2 #10002 [#_OFSXW[2]] : : : 199 #10...

  • Page 206

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - Workpiece coordinate system shift amount #2501, #2601 (Attribute: R/W) T System variables #2501 and #2601 can be used to read the workpiece coordinate system shift amount of the X-axis and Z-axis, respectively. The workpiece coordinate system shift am...

  • Page 207

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO - Controlling of single block stop and waiting for the auxiliary function completion signal #3003 (Attribute: R/W) Assigning the following values in system variable #3003 allows the specification of whether single block stop is disabled in the following ...

  • Page 208

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 182 - In addition, the following variable names can be used to enable or disable feed hold, feedrate override, and exact stop in G61 mode or by the G09 command, individually. Variable number and variable name Value Feed hold Feedrate override Exact stop ...

  • Page 209

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO - 183 - Variable number Variable name Description #3006 [#_MSGSTP] Stop with a message - Status of a mirror image #3007 (Attribute: R) The status of an mirror image (setting or DI) at that point in time can be obtained for each axis by reading #3007. ...

  • Page 210

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - Type of tool compensation memory #3980 (Attribute: R) M System variable #3980 can be used to read the type of compensation memory. Variable number Variable name Description #3980 [#_OFSMEM] Types of tool compensation memory 0: Tool compensation memo...

  • Page 211

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO - 185 - Category Variable number Variable name Description <1> <2> <3> #4107 #4307 #4507 [#_BUFD] [#_ACTD] [#_INTD] Modal information (D code) <1> <2> <3> #4108 #4308 #4508 [#_BUFE] [#_ACTE] [#_INTE] Modal information (E...

  • Page 212

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 186 - Category Variable number Variable name Description <1> <2> <3> #4114 #4314 #4514 [#_BUFN] [#_ACTN] [#_INTN] Modal information (sequence number N) <1> <2> <3> #4115 #4315 #4515 [#_BUFO] [#_ACTO] [#_INTO] Modal inf...

  • Page 213

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO - 187 - Variable number Variable namePosition information Coordinate system Tool position/tool length/cutter compensation Reading operation during movement #5041 : #5045 [#_ABSOT[1]] : [#_ABSOT[5]] 1st axis current position : 5th axis current position Work...

  • Page 214

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 <2> With tool geometry/wear compensation memory (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No.8136 = 0) Variable number Variable name Position information Read operation during movement #5081 #5082 #5083 #5084 #5085 [#_TOFSWX] [#_TOFSWZ] [#_TOFSWY] [#_TOFS[4]] [#_TO...

  • Page 215

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO Variable number Variable name Position information Read operation during movement #5121 : #5125 [#_MIRTP[1]] : [#_MIRTP[5]] 1st axis manual handle interruption : 5th axis manual handle interruption Disabled NOTE When variables exceeding the number of co...

  • Page 216

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 190 - Variable number Variable name Controlled axis Workpiece coordinate system #5301 : #5305 [#_WZG58[1]] : [#_WZG58[5]] 1st axis workpiece origin offset value : 5th axis workpiece origin offset value G58 #5321 : #5325 [#_WZG59[1]] : [#_WZG59[5]] 1st ax...

  • Page 217

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO - 191 - Axis Function Variable number2nd axis External workpiece origin offset value #2650 G54 workpiece origin offset value #2651 G55 workpiece origin offset value #2652 G56 workpiece origin offset value #2653 G57 workpiece origin offset value #2654 ...

  • Page 218

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 192 - Variable number Variable name Controlled axis Additional workpiece system number #7021 : #7025 [#_WZP2[1]] : [#_WZP2[5]] 1st axis workpiece origin offset value : 5th axis workpiece origin offset value 2 (G54.1 P2) : : : : #7941 : #7945 [#_WZP48[1]]...

  • Page 219

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO - 193 - #8570 setting Specified variable Corresponding variable #8570 = 1 #10000 : #89999 P-CODE variables (#10000) : P-CODE variables (#89999) Example #8570 = 0 ; #10001 = 123 ; → Writing to system variable #10001 (tool compensation) #8570 = 1 ;...

  • Page 220

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 194 - Type of operation Operation Description <4> Functions #i=SIN[#j] #i=COS[#j] #i=TAN[#j] #i=ASIN[#j] #i=ACOS[#j] #i=ATAN[#j] #i=ATAN[#j]/[#k] #i=ATAN[#j,#k] #i=SQRT[#j] #i=ABS[#j] #i=BIN[#j] #i=BCD[#j] #i=ROUND[#j] #i=FIX[#j] #i=FUP[#j] #i=LN[#...

  • Page 221

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO - 195 - - ARCTAN #i = ATAN[#j]; (one argument) • When ATAN is specified with one argument, this function returns the main value of arc tangent (-90° ≤ ATAN[#j] ≤ 90°). In other word, this function returns the same value as ATAN in calculator spec...

  • Page 222

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - Rounding up and down to an integer (FUP and FIX) With CNC, when the absolute value of the integer produced by an operation on a number is greater than the absolute value of the original number, such an operation is referred to as rounding up to an integ...

  • Page 223

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO - 197 - Limitation • Caution concerning decreased precision When bit 0 (F0C) of parameter No. 6008 is set to 0 • Addition and subtraction Note that when an absolute value is subtracted from another absolute value in addition or subtraction, the relat...

  • Page 224

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 198 - When bit 0 (F0C) of parameter No. 6008 is set to 1 Errors may occur when operations are performed. Table 14.3 (b) Errors involved in operations Operation Average error Maximum error Type of error a = b*c 1.55×10-10 4.66×10-10 a = b / c 4.66...

  • Page 225

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO - 199 - - Brackets Brackets ([ ]) are used to enclose an expression. Note that parentheses ( ) are used for comments. - Divisor When a divisor of zero is specified in a division, an alarm PS0112 occurs.

  • Page 226

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 200 - 14.4 READING PARAMETERS Overview By using the PRM function, it is possible to read parameters. Format Remarks #i = PRM[ #j, #k ] ; In the case of parameters other than axis type parameters#i = PRM[ #j, #k ] / [ #l ] ; In the case of axis type param...

  • Page 227

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO 14.5 MACRO STATEMENTS AND NC STATEMENTS The following blocks are referred to as macro statements: • Blocks containing an arithmetic or logic operation (=) • Blocks containing a control statement (such as GOTO, DO, END) • Blocks containing a macro cal...

  • Page 228

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 NOTE 1 A backward branch takes more time as compared with a forward branch. 2 In the block with sequence number n, which is the branch destination of the GOTO n command, sequence number n must be located at the beginning of the block. Otherwise, the branc...

  • Page 229

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO NOTE When an external program is read and executed by DNC operation, the executed sequence numbers are not stored. When a program registered in memory is executed by a subprogram call, the sequence numbers are stored. CAUTION According to the restriction...

  • Page 230

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - Relational operators Relational operators each consist of two letters and are used to compare two values to determine whether they are equal or one value is smaller or greater than the other value. Note that the equal sign (=) and inequality sign (>...

  • Page 231

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO Processing1. The identification numbers (1 to3) can be used as many timesas required.WHILE [ … ] DO 1 ;END 1 ; :ProcessingWHILE [ … ] DO 1 ;END 1 ; :2. DO ranges cannotoverlap.ProcessingWHILE [ … ] DO 1 ;END 1 ;ProcessingWHILE [ … ] DO 2 ; :END ...

  • Page 232

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 206 - Sample program The sample program below finds the total of numbers 1 to 10. O0001; #1=0; #2=1; WHILE[#2 LE 10] DO 1; #1=#1+#2; #2=#2+1; END 1; M30; 14.7 MACRO CALL A macro program can be called using the following methods. The calling methods can...

  • Page 233

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO 14.7.1 Simple Call (G65) When G65 is specified, the custom macro specified at address P is called. Data (argument) can be passed to the custom macro program. P : Number of the program to calll : Repetition count (1 by default)Argument : Data passed to ...

  • Page 234

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 • Argument specification II Argument specification II uses A, B, and C once each and uses I, J, and K up to ten times. Argument specification II is used to pass values such as three-dimensional coordinates as arguments. AddressVariablenumberABCI1J1K1I...

  • Page 235

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO CAUTION The value of an argument passed without a decimal point may vary according to the system configuration of the machine. It is good practice to use decimal points in macro call arguments to maintain program compatibility. M When a value is specifi...

  • Page 236

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 NOTE 5 When bit 1 (FR3) of parameter No. 1405 is 1, the values in the table need to be incremented by 1. 6 When calculator-type decimal notation is used (bit 0 (DPI) of parameter No. 3401 is set to 1), the number of decimal places is 0. T When a value i...

  • Page 237

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO NOTE 4 When bit 2 (FM3) of parameter No. 1404 is 1, the values in the table need to be incremented by 3. 5 When calculator-type decimal notation is used (bit 0 (DPI) of parameter No. 3401 is set to 1), the number of decimal places is 0. 6 When bit 2 (DPD) ...

  • Page 238

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 212 - - Calling format G65 P9100 Xx Yy Zz Rr Ff Ii Aa Bb Hh ; X : X coordinate of the center of the circle (absolute or incremental programming).............................................................................. ...

  • Page 239

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO Meaning of variables: Stores the G code of group 3. #5: X coordinate of the next hole to drill #6: Y coordinate of the next hole to drill Sample program (Drill cycle) T Move the tool beforehand along the X- and Z-axes to the position where a drilling ...

  • Page 240

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 IF [#1 GE #23] GOTO 9 ; .........Checks whether drilling is completed. #2=#1 ; .....................................Stores the depth of the current hole. GOTO 1 ; N9 M99 ; N8 #3000=1 (NOT Z OR W COMMAND) ; .....Issues an alarm. 14.7.2 Modal Call: Call ...

  • Page 241

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO Execution order of the above program (blocks not containing the move command omitted) (1-1) (1-2) (1-3) (2-1) (3-1) (3-2) (2-1) (2-1) * No modal call is performed after (1-3) because the mode is not the macro call mode. Limitation • G66 and G67 blo...

  • Page 242

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 G66 P9110 Z-20.0 R5.0 F500 ; G90 X20.0 Y20.0 ; X50.0 ; Y50.0 ; X70.0 Y80.0 ; G67 ; M30 ; - Macro program (program called) O9110 ; #1=#4001 ; .............................Stores G00/G01. #3=#4003 ; ...............................Stores G90/G91. #4=#410...

  • Page 243

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO M30 ; - Macro program (program called) O9110 ; G01 U-#21 F#9 ;...... Cuts the workpiece. G00 U#21 ; .............. Retracts the tool. M99 ; 14.7.3 Macro Call Using a G Code By setting a G code number used to call a macro program in a parameter, the macr...

  • Page 244

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 Limitation - Nesting of calls using G codes • To call another program in a program called using a G code, only G65, M98, or G66 can be used normally. • When bit 6 (GMP) of parameter No. 6008 is set to 1, a call using an M code, T code, or specific cod...

  • Page 245

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO - 219 - Explanation By setting an M code number from 3 to 99999999 used to call custom macro program O9020 to O9029 in the corresponding parameter (Nos. 6080 to 6089), the macro program can be called in the same way as with G65. - Correspondence between ...

  • Page 246

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 220 - [Example] Set parameter No. 6047 to 90000000, parameter No. 6048 to 4000, and parameter No. 6049 to 100. M90000000 → O4000 M90000001 → O4001 M90000002 → O4002 : M90000099 → O4099 Custom macro calls (simple calls) for 100 combinat...

  • Page 247

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO - M code An M code in a macro program that has been called is treated as an ordinary M code. Limitation • To call another program in a program called using an M code, only G65, M98, or G66 can be used normally. • When bit 6 (GMP) of parameter No. 600...

  • Page 248

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 Explanation - Call By setting bit 5 (TCS) of parameter No. 6001 to 1, subprogram O9000 can be called each time a T code is specified in a machining program. A T code specified in a machining program is assigned to common variable #149. - Repetition As ...

  • Page 249

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO Address Parameter setting R 82 S 83 T 84 V 86 X 88 Y 89 Z 90 NOTE When address L is set, the number of repetitions cannot be set. T Address Parameter setting A 65 B 66 F 70 H 72 I 73 J 74 K 75 L 76 M 77 P 80 Q 81 R 82 S 83 T 84 NOTE When address L is ...

  • Page 250

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 224 - Sample program By using the subprogram call function that uses M codes, the cumulative usage time of each tool is measured. Conditions • The cumulative usage time of each of tools T01 to T05 is measured. No measurement is made for tools with nu...

  • Page 251

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO #3002=0 ; ....................................................... Clears the timer. N9 M03 ;.................................................................. Rotates the spindle in the M99 ; .................................................................

  • Page 252

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - Buffering the next block in other than cutter compensation mode (G41, G42) N1N2N3N4N4>N1 X100.0 ;> : Block being executed : Block read into the bufferNC statementexecutionMacro statementexecutionBufferN2 #1=100 ;N3 #2=200 ;N4 Y200.0 ; When N1 i...

  • Page 253

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO - 227 - 14.10 CODES AND RESERVED WORDS USED IN CUSTOM MACROS In addition to the codes used in ordinary programs, the following codes are used in custom macro programs. Explanation - Codes (1) When the ISO code is used or when bit 4 (ISO) of parameter No....

  • Page 254

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 228 - 14.11 EXTERNAL OUTPUT COMMANDS In addition to the standard custom macro commands, the following macro commands are available. They are referred to as external output commands. • BPRNT • DPRNT • POPEN • PCLOS These commands are provided to ...

  • Page 255

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO Example BPRNT [ C** X#100 [3] Y#101 [3] M#10 [0] ] Variable value #100=0.40956 #101=-1638.4 #10=12.34 are output as follows: - 229 - ↓ ↓ C sp sp X0000019A YFFE70000 M00000...

  • Page 256

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 230 - Example DPRNT [ X#2 [53] Y#5 [53] T#30 [20] ] Variable value #2=128.47398 #5=-91.2 #30=123.456 are output as follows: (1) Parameter PRT (No.6001#1) = 0 (2) Parameter PRT (No.6001#1) = 1 - Close command PCLOS The PCLOS command...

  • Page 257

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO 14.12 RESTRICTIONS - Single block Even while a macro program is being executed, blocks can be stopped in the single block mode. A block containing a macro call command (G65, G66, Ggg, Mmm, or G67) does not stop even when the single block mode is on. Whethe...

  • Page 258

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 However, this restriction is removed when a program registered in program memory is called during DNC operation. - Constant values that can be used in <expression> +0.00000000001 to +999999999999 -999999999999 to -0.00000000001 The number of signif...

  • Page 259

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO - 233 - ((UINT)** and (UINT)* in Fig 14.13 (a)) is input during execution of the interrupt program or after M97, it is ignored. 14.13.1 Specification Method Explanation - Interrupt conditions A custom macro interrupt is available only during program exec...

  • Page 260

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 234 - 14.13.2 Details of Functions Explanation - Subprogram-type interrupt and macro-type interrupt There are two types of custom macro interrupts: Subprogram-type interrupts and macro-type interrupts. The interrupt type used is selected by bit 5 (MSB...

  • Page 261

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO CAUTION For interrupt type I, operation after control is returned differs depending on whether the interrupt program contains an NC statement. When the program number block contains EOB (;), it is assumed to contain an NC statement. (Program containing an...

  • Page 262

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 Custom macro interruptExecution in progressExecution in progressNormal programNC statement in the interruptprogramInterrupt signal (UINT) input Fig. 14.13 (c) Custom macro interrupt and NC command (type II) M NOTE During execution of a program for cycle ...

  • Page 263

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO - Custom macro interrupt signal (UINT) There are two schemes for custom macro interrupt signal (UINT) input: The status-triggered scheme and edge-triggered scheme. When the status-triggered scheme is used, the signal is valid when it is on. When the ed...

  • Page 264

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 NOTE If a block containing M99 is alone or has address O, N, P, L, or M only, this block is programmatically assumed to be the same as the previous block. Therefore, a single-block stop does not occur for this block. In terms of programming, the followi...

  • Page 265

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14.CUSTOM MACRO Modal information when control is returned by M99 Pyyyy The new modal information modified by the interrupt program remains valid even after control is returned. Modal information which was valid in the interrupted block The old modal information which wa...

  • Page 266

    14.CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 240 - BBA’AInterrupt generated Programmed tool pathOffset vector Tool center path - Custom macro interrupt and custom macro modal call When the interrupt signal (UINT) is input and an interrupt program is called, the custom macro modal call is c...

  • Page 267

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15.PROGRAMMABLEPARAMETER INPUT (G10)- 241 - 15 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10) Overview The values of parameters and pitch error compensation data can be entered in a program. This function is used for setting pitch error compensation data when attachments are changed...

  • Page 268

    PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 15. PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10) - Bit number (Q_) Bit number (Q_) is effective if bit 4 (G1B) of parameter No. 3454 is 1. To set a bit type parameter, set a number in the range of 0 to 7. A custom macro variable can be used as the value of Q. - Axis number (P...

  • Page 269

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING - 243 - 15.PROGRAMMABLEPARAMETER INPUT (G10)4. Change compensation point numbers 10 and 20 of pitch error compensation. G10 L50 ; Pitch error compensation data entry mode N10010 R1 ; Change the compensation point number from 10 to 1 N10020 R5 ; Change the compensation po...

  • Page 270

    PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 244 - 16. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS 16 HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Chapter 16, "HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS", consists of the following sections: 16.1 ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL (T SERIES) / AI ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL (M SERIES) / AI CONTOUR CONTROL (II...

  • Page 271

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING - 245 - 16.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSAI APC : AI advanced preview control AICC : AI contour control AICC II : AI contour control II -: Function not supported ○: Standard function ☆: Optional function M The function for changing time constant of bell-shaped acce...

  • Page 272

    PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 246 - 16. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS * Look-ahead bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is an optional function. - Setting an acceleration T A permissible acceleration for the linear acceleration/deceleration of each axis is set in parameter N...

  • Page 273

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING - 247 - 16.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSSince N3 performs interpolation for the X and Y axes in the 45-degree direction, the acceleration of the Y axis is controlled according to the X axis to become 1000 mm/s2. Therefore, the combined acceleration is 1414 mm/s2. 20ms20m...

  • Page 274

    PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 248 - 16. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS - Deceleration Deceleration starts in advance so that the feedrate programmed for a block is attained at the beginning of the block. When look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is valid for multiple blocks, dec...

  • Page 275

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING - 249 - 16.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSHere, the acceleration change time (T2) remains constant regardless of the specified feedrate, while the acceleration time for the linear section (T1), which is determined by acceleration, varies with the specified feedrate. If T1 b...

  • Page 276

    PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 250 - 16. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS - Automatic feedrate control function During the advanced preview control, AI advanced preview control, or AI contour control (II) mode, the feedrate is automatically controlled by reading blocks in advance. The feedrate is deter...

  • Page 277

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING - 251 - 16.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS The method of deceleration based on the feedrate difference differs depending on the setting made for parameter FNW (bit 6 of No. 19500). If "0" is set, the largest feedrate that doe...

  • Page 278

    PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 252 - 16. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Decelerate the X axis down to 500 mm/min Decelerate the X/Y axis down to 250 mm/min (The tangent direction feedrate is 354 mm/min.)(Example) If parameter FNW (bit 6 of No. 19500) = 0 and the permissible feedrate difference = 50...

  • Page 279

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING - 253 - 16.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS Decelerate the X axis down to 354 mm/minDecelerate the X/Y axis down to 250 mm/min (The tangent direction feedrate is 354 mm/min.) (Example) If parameter FNW (bit 6 of No. 19500) = 1 and permissible feedrate difference = 500 mm/min...

  • Page 280

    PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 254 - 16. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS M - Speed control with the acceleration on each axis When consecutive small lines are used to form a curve, as in the example shown in the figure below, the feedrate differences on each axis at the individual corners are not very...

  • Page 281

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING - 255 - 16.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS(Example) If a circular shape with a radius of 10 mm is specified with smallline blocksParameter FNW (bit 6 of No. 19500) = 0Permissible acceleration = 1000 mm/s2 (on all axes)The feedrate ishigher in thesedirections.Tangent feedrate...

  • Page 282

    PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 256 - 16. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Large acceleration: Programmed path: Recognized figure Also for a part of a programmed figure in which a large acceleration would be required, the acceleration is obtained based on the figure recognized from multiple blocks, and ...

  • Page 283

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING - 257 - 16.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSIn AI contour control II, the tool travel direction on the Z-axis is used as a condition for calculating the machining feedrate. This function is enabled when bit 4 (ZAG) of parameter No. 8451 is set to 1. During ascent on the Z-axi...

  • Page 284

    PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 258 - 16. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS CAUTION 1 The speed control with the cutting feed is effective only when the tool is parallel with the Z-axis. Thus, it may not be possible to apply this function, depending on the structure of the machine used. 2 In the speed c...

  • Page 285

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING - 259 - 16.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSFunction name G code Variable-lead threading (NOTE 2) G34 Single threading cycle (NOTE 2) G92 Multiple repetitive threading cycle (NOTE 2) G76 When no move command is specified - One-shot G code other than those shown at right (NOT...

  • Page 286

    PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 260 - 16. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Parameter No. Parameter Advanced preview controlAI advanced preview control AI contour control (II)Acceleration/deceleration type (acceleration constant (0)/time constant (1)) 1603#4 PRT Acceleration/deceleration type (after inter...

  • Page 287

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING - 261 - 16.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS Speed control with acceleration in circular interpolation Parameter No. Parameter Advanced preview controlAI advanced preview control AI contour control (II)Lower-limit feedrate for the deceleration function with the acceleration...

  • Page 288

    PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 262 - 16. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS T For advanced preview control G08 P1 Rx ; x .......Level (1 to 10) CAUTION Once specified, a level remains effective even if the advanced preview control mode is canceled. M For AI advanced preview control/AI contour con...

  • Page 289

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING - 263 - 16.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS16.4 JERK CONTROL (M Series) M 16.4.1 Speed Control with Change of Acceleration on Each Axis Overview In portions in which acceleration changes largely, such as a portion where a programmed figure changes from a straight line to curv...

  • Page 290

    PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 264 - 16. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS 22/1000smmrv = Y X Y-axis acceleration Acceleration TimeFrom straight line to arcSpecified feedrate: 6000 mm/min Acceleration change amount: 1000 mm/s2 Arc radius: 10 mm To suppress the change of acceleration to 300 mm/s2, s...

  • Page 291

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING - 265 - 16.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONS When linear interpolation is followed by circular interpolation, speed control is performed using the permissible acceleration change amount set in parameter No. 1788. Linear interpolation Circular interpolation For successive linea...

  • Page 292

    PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 266 - 16. HIGH-SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS 16.4.2 Look-Ahead Smooth Bell-Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration before Interpolation Overview In look-ahead bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation performs smooth acceleration/deceleration by changing the accele...

  • Page 293

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING - 267 - 16.HIGH-SPEED CUTTINGFUNCTIONSExplanation - Setting the jerk change time The jerk change time is set in parameter No. 1790 by using the percentage to the acceleration change time. The actual jerk change time is represented by the percentage to the acceleration c...

  • Page 294

    17.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 17 AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS Chapter 21, "AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS", consists of the following sections: 17.1 AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL............................................................................................... 294,268 17...

  • Page 295

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 17.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 269 - - Synchronous operation and normal operation Operation where axis synchronous control is turned on (enabled) to make a movement along the slave axis in synchronism with the master axis is referred to as synchronous operation. Operation ...

  • Page 296

    17.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 270 - Axis name indication Controlled axis number Axis name Parameter (No. 1020) SubscriptParameter (No.3131)Master axis numberParameter (No.8311)Operation XM 1 88 77 0 Y 2 89 0 0 X1 3 88 49 1 A movement is made in synchronism with the XM-axi...

  • Page 297

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 17.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 271 - 17.1.2 Synchronous Establishment Explanation Upon power-up or after emergency stop cancellation, the machine positions on the master axis and slave axis under axis synchronous control are not always the same. In such a case, the synchron...

  • Page 298

    17.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 NOTE When the grid position difference between the master axis and slave axis is large, a reference position shift can occur, depending on the timing of the *DEC signal set to 1. In the example below, the shift along the slave axis is so large ...

  • Page 299

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 17.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 273 - [Operation procedure] The procedure below is usable when bit 0 (ATE) of parameter No. 8303 is set to 1. 1. Set bit 1 (ATS) of parameter No. 8303 to 1. 2. Turn off the power then turn on the power. 3. Set the REF mode (or JOG mode in the c...

  • Page 300

    17.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 274 - 17.1.5 Methods of Alarm Recovery by Synchronous Error Check Explanation To recover from an alarm issued as a result of synchronous error check, two methods are available. One method uses the correction mode, and the other uses normal ope...

  • Page 301

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 17.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS 17.1.6 Axis Synchronous Control Torque Difference Alarm Explanation If a movement made along the master axis differs from a movement made along the slave axis during axis synchronous control, the machine can be damaged. To prevent such damage, t...

  • Page 302

    17.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 SA<F000#6>10Alarm detection function EnabledSetting of parameter No. 8327(512 msec when this parameter is not set)Disabled Fig. 17.1.6 (b) Timing chart When the servo ready signal SA <F000.6> is set to 0, torque difference alarm det...

  • Page 303

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 17.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 277 - NOTE 5 When controlled axis removal is performed, the synchronization state is cancelled. When performing controlled axis removal, perform removal for the master axis and slave axis at the same time. 6 If a programmed command is specifie...

  • Page 304

    17.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 M NOTE This function cannot be used together with the index table indexing function. 17.3 ARBITRARY ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL Overview When the angular axis installed makes an angle other than 90° with the perpendicular axis, the Arbitrary angular...

  • Page 305

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 17.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS +Y (Angular axis)+Y' (Hypothetical axis)θYp tanθ (perpendicular axiscomponent produced bytravel along the angular axis)Xp and YpXa and YaActual tool travel+X (Perpendicular axis) Fig. 17.3 (b) - Feedrate When the Y-axis is an angular axis, an...

  • Page 306

    17.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - Automatic reference position return operation (G28, G30) A movement to the middle point along the angular axis affects a movement along the perpendicular axis. As a movement from the middle point to the reference position along the angular a...

  • Page 307

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 17.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS (2) If bit 0 (ARF) of parameter No. 8209 is 0 <1> Coordinates at P1 (Absolute coordinate) (Machine coordinate) X 0.000 X 0.000 Y 100.000 Y 115.470 <2> Coordinates at P0 (Absolute coordinate) (Machine coordinate) X 0.000 X...

  • Page 308

    17.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 +Y (Angular axis) +Y' (Hypothetical axis)P1(0,100)P2(200,100)+X(Perpendicularaxis)P0(0,0)30° - Commands for linear interpolation and linear interpolation type positioning (G01, G00) The tool moves to a specified position in the Cartesian coord...

  • Page 309

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 17.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS <2> Coordinates of P2 (Absolute coordinate) (Machine coordinate) X 200.000 X 200.000 Y 100.000 Y 115.470 30°P1P0(0,0)P2200115.470 +Y (Angular axis)+Y' (Hypothetical axis) +X (Perpendicular axis) - Stored stroke limit Stored stro...

  • Page 310

    17.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 M • Stroke limit external setting (valid only for OT1) The stored stroke limit functions other than the above work in a angular coordinate system. - Relationships between this function and axis-by-axis input/output signals The table below i...

  • Page 311

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 17.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS Output signal Signal name Address ClassificationRemarks In-position signal INPx F104 Angular Applied to each axis independently. Mirror image check signal MMIx F108 Angular Applied to each axis independently. Controlled axis removal in-progress ...

  • Page 312

    17.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - Rigid tapping As a rigid tapping axis, no angular axis can be used. - Functions that cannot be used simultaneously • Axis synchronous control, rigid tapping, PMC axis control T • Polygon turning, superimposed control M • Electronic...

  • Page 313

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 17.AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS - 287 - 17.4 TANDEM CONTROL When enough torque for driving a large table cannot be produced by only one motor, two motors can be used for movement along a single axis. Positioning is performed by the main motor only. The submotor is used only to ...

  • Page 314

    18.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 288 - 18 PATTERN DATA INPUT Chapter 18, "PATTERN DATA INPUT", consists of the following sections: 18.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................................

  • Page 315

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 18.PATTERN DATA INPUT (1) Pattern menu screen Fig. 18.2 (a) Pattern data menu screen (10.4-inch) (2) Custom macro screen The name of variable and comment can be displayed on the usual custom macro screen. The menu title and pattern name on the pattern menu screen and ...

  • Page 316

    18.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 18.3 EXPLANATION OF OPERATION The following explains how to display the pattern menu screen. 1 Press function key . 2 Press continuous menu key . 3 Press soft key [PATTERN MENU] ([MENU] for the 8.4-inch display unit). Pattern menu screen The follow...

  • Page 317

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 18.PATTERN DATA INPUT Custom macro variable screen The following custom macro screen is displayed. Fig. 18.3 (b) Custom macro screen when the pattern data is input (10.4-inch) When the screen is changed to the custom macro screen, the macro variable number that is sele...

  • Page 318

    18.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 292 - Sub program No. Screen O9509 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.9 O9510 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.10 Table 18.4 (b) Macro commands used in the patte...

  • Page 319

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 18.PATTERN DATA INPUT - Format G65 H90 P_ Q_ R_ I_ J_ K_ ; H90 : Specifies the menu title P_ : The code of 1st and 2nd characters of title Q_ : The code of 3rd and 4th characters of title R_ : The code of 5th and 6th characters of title I_ : The code of 7th and 8th chara...

  • Page 320

    18.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 O9500 ; N1 G65 H90 P072079 Q076069 R032080 I065084 J084069 K082078 ;.. "HOLE PATTERN" N2 G65 H91 P1 Q066079 R076084 I032072 J079076 K069032 ; ........... "BOLT HOLE" N3 G65 H91 P2 Q071082 R073068 ; ...................................

  • Page 321

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 18.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 295 - - Format G65 H92 P_ Q_ R_ I_ J_ K_ ; H92 : Specifies the menu title P_ : The code of 1st and 2nd characters of the menu title Q_ : The code of 3rd and 4th characters of the menu title R_ : The code of 5th and 6th characters of the menu title...

  • Page 322

    18.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - Format G65 H94 P_ Q_ R_ I_ J_ K_ ; H94 : Specifies the comment P_ : The code of 1st and 2nd characters of comment Q_ : The code of 3rd and 4th characters of comment R_ : The code of 5th and 6th characters of comment I_ : The code of 7th and 8th ch...

  • Page 323

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 18.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 297 - Example) When "ABCDEFGH" is specified, the description of the code is as follows. Encoded character string : 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 P065066 Q067068 R069070 I071072 ; AB CD EF GH NOTE 1 S...

  • Page 324

    18.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 298 - The characters and the codes of the katakana is as follows. Character Code Comment Character Code Comment ア 177 ム 209 イ 178 メ 210 ウ 179 モ 211 エ 180 ヤ 212 オ 181 ユ 213 カ 182 ヨ 214 キ 183 ラ 215 ク 184 ...

  • Page 325

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 18.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 299 - ぽ ま み む め も ゃ や ゅ ゆ 002 120 002 122 002 124 002 126002 128002 130002 132002 134 002 136 002 138ょ よ ら り る れ ろ わ わ 素 002 140 002 142 002 144 002 146002 148002 150002 152002 154 002 156 002 158材 を ん ...

  • Page 326

    18.PATTERN DATA INPUT PROGRAMMING B-64304EN/02 - 300 - 億 屋 化 何 絵 階 概 該 巻 換 004 120 004 122 004 124 004 126004 128004 130004 132004 134 004 136 004 138気 起 軌 技 疑 供 共 境 強 教 004 140 004 142 004 144 004 146004 148004 150004 152004 154 004 156 004 158掘 繰 係 ...

  • Page 327

    B-64304EN/02 PROGRAMMING 18.PATTERN DATA INPUT - 301 - 打 体 待 態 替 段 知 地 致 遅 006 120 006 122 006 124 006 126006 128006 130006 132006 134 006 136 006 138追 通 伝 得 読 凸 凹 突 鈍 敗 006 140 006 142 006 144 006 146006 148006 150006 152006 154 006 156 006 158杯 背 配 ...

  • Page 328

  • Page 329

    III. OPERATION

  • Page 330

  • Page 331

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 1.GENERAL 1 GENERAL Chapter 1, "GENERAL", consists of the following sections: 1.1 MANUAL OPERATION.................................................................................................................. 331,305 1.2 TOOL MOVEMENT BY PROGRAMING - AUTOMATI...

  • Page 332

    1.GENERAL OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Tool WorkpieceMachine operator's panel Manual pulse generator Fig. 1.1 (b) The tool movement by manual operation The tool can be moved in the following ways: (i) Jog feed (See Section III-3.2) The tool moves continuously while a pushbutton remains pressed. (i...

  • Page 333

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 1.GENERAL Explanation - Memory operation After the program is once registered in memory of CNC, the machine can be run according to the program instructions. This operation is called memory operation. CNCMachineMemory Fig. 1.2 (b) Memory operation - MDI operation After t...

  • Page 334

    1.GENERAL OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - Start and stop Pressing the cycle start pushbutton causes automatic operation to start. By pressing the feed hold or reset pushbutton, automatic operation pauses or stops. By specifying the program stop or program termination command in the program, the runnin...

  • Page 335

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 1.GENERAL ToolTable Fig. 1.4.1 (a) Dry run - Feedrate override Check the program by changing the feedrate specified in the program. (See Section III-5.2) ToolFeedrate specified by program :100 mm/min.Feedrate after feed rateoverride (20%) : 20 mm/min.Workpiece Fig. 1.4.1...

  • Page 336

    1.GENERAL OPERATION B-64304EN/02 1.4.2 How to View the Current Position Display Change without Running the Machine Explanation - Machine Lock MDI XYZTool The tool remains stopped, and only thepositional displays of the axes change. Workpiece Fig. 1.4.2 (a) Machine Lock - Auxiliary function ...

  • Page 337

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 1.GENERAL Explanation - Offset value SettingDisplayScreen Keys MDI Geometry Wear compensation compensation Tool compensation number 1 12.3 25.0 Tool compensation number 2 20.0 40.0 Tool compensation number 3 CNC memory Fig. 1.6 (b) Displaying and Setting Offset Valu...

  • Page 338

    1.GENERAL OPERATION B-64304EN/02 SettingScreen Keys MDI DisplayingCNC MemoryProgram Automatic operation Movement of the machine Operational characteristics Setting data Inch/Metric switching Ì ÝSelection of I/O device Mirror image ON/OFF setting : : : Fig. 1.6 (d) Displaying and setting ope...

  • Page 339

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 1.GENERAL Program Offset value Parameters Setting data Data SettingMachine operator's panel Screen Keys Data protection key MDI SignalData protection keyRegistration / modification inhibition CNC memory Fig. 1.6 (f) Data protection key 1.7 DISPLAY 1.7.1 Program Display ...

  • Page 340

    1.GENERAL OPERATION B-64304EN/02 The programs in the program memory are listed. Fig. 1.7.1 (b) 1.7.2 Current Position Display The current position of the tool is displayed with the coordinate values. Moreover, the distance from the current position to a target point can be displayed as a remai...

  • Page 341

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 1.GENERAL Fig. 1.7.2 (b) 1.7.3 Alarm Display When a trouble occurs during operation, error code and alarm message are displayed on the screen. (See Section III-7.1.) See APPENDIX G for the list of error codes and their meanings. Fig. 1.7.3 (a) - 315 -

  • Page 342

    1.GENERAL OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 316 - 1.7.4 Parts Count Display, Run Time Display The position display screen displays a machined parts count, run time, and cycle time. (See Section lll-12.3.3.) Fig. 1.7.4 (a)

  • Page 343

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 317 - 2 OPERATIONAL DEVICES As operational devices, setting and display devices attached to the CNC, and machine operator's panels are available. For machine operator's panels, refer to the relevant manual of the machine tool builder. Chapter 2, &qu...

  • Page 344

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-64304EN/02 2.1.1 8.4” LCD/MDI 8.4” LCD/MDI (vertical type)8.4” LCD/MDI (horizontal type)- 318 -

  • Page 345

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES 2.1.2 10.4” LCD 2.1.3 Standard MDI Unit (ONG Key) 10.4” LCD (Note) The touch panel display unit has no soft keys. - Unit with M series system RESET key HELP key Address keys/Numeric keysSHIFT key Page change keys Cursor move keys Function key...

  • Page 346

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - Unit with T series system RESET key HELP key Address keys/Numeric keys SHIFT key Page change keys Cursor move keys Function keys Edit keys Cancel (CAN) key INPUT key 2.1.4 Small MDI Unit (ONG Key) - Unit with M series system Small MDI unit (ONG...

  • Page 347

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES Small MDI unit (ONG Key, vertical type) RESET key HELP key Address keys/Numeric keysSHIFT keyPage change keys Cursor move keys Function keys Edit keys Soft keysINPUT key - Unit with T series system Small MDI unit (ONG Key, horizontal type) RESET...

  • Page 348

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Small MDI unit (ONG Key, vertical type) RESET key HELP key Address keys/Numeric keys SHIFT key Page change keys Cursor move keys Function keys Edit keys Soft keys INPUT key 2.2 OPERATIONAL DEVICES Table 2.2 (a) Explanation of the MDI keyboard Numb...

  • Page 349

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 323 - Number Name Explanation 7 CANCEL (CAN) key Press this key to delete the last character or symbol input to the key input buffer.Example) When the key input buffer displays >N001X100Z_ and the cancel key is pressed, Z is canceled and >...

  • Page 350

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-64304EN/02 2.3.1 General Screen Operations - Procedure 1 By pressing a function key on the MDI panel, the chapter selection soft keys that belong to the function are displayed. Example 1) Operation selection key Continuous menu keyChapter selection soft keys ...

  • Page 351

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES Example 1) For the 8.4-inch LCD display unit Chapter selection soft keys Operation selection soft keys Operation selection keys, auxiliary menu Example 2) For the 10.4-inch LCD display unit Chapter selection soft keys Operation selec...

  • Page 352

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Press this key to display the custom screen 1 (conversational macro screen or C language executor screen). For the small MDI unit, press . Press this key to display the custom screen 2 (conversational macro screen or C language executor screen). F...

  • Page 353

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES Position display screen The chapter selection soft keys that belong to the function key and the function of each screen are described below. ABS REL ALL HNDL (OPRT)Page 1 +(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) MONI (OPRT)Page 2 +(6) (7) (8) (9) (10) Table 2.3.3 ...

  • Page 354

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-64304EN/02 In the MDI mode PROGRMMDI CURRENTNEXT (OPRT)Page 1 +(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) RESTARTDIR (OPRT)Page 2 +(6) (7) (8) (9) (10) In the EDIT/TJOG/THND mode PROGRMDIR C.A.P (OPRT)Page 1 +(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) In the JOG/HND/REF mode PROGRM CURRENTNEX...

  • Page 355

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES * The items enclosed by parentheses on the second line under "Chapter menu" are displayed in the 10.4-inch display unit. Offset/setting screen The chapter selection soft keys that belong to the function key and the function of each screen a...

  • Page 356

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 330 - No. Chapter menu Description (14) BARRIER (BARRIER) Selects the chuck tail stock barrier screen. (Only for the T series) (17) PR-LEV (PRECI LEVEL) Selects the screen for setting precision levels. (Machining condition selection function) (22) LA...

  • Page 357

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES ID-INF MEMORY (OPRT)Page 9 +(41) (42) (43) (44) (45) Page 10 (46) (47) (48) (49) (50) PROF.MPROF.S (OPRT)+ RMTDIAGM-TUN (OPRT)Page 8 +(36) (37) (38) (39) (40) Table 2.3.3 (d) System No. Chapter menu Description (1) PARAM (PARAMETER) Sele...

  • Page 358

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 332 - No. Chapter menu Description (31) EMBED (EMBED PORT) Selects the screen for making settings related to the embedded Ethernet (embedded port). (32) PCMCIA (PCMCIA LAN) Selects the screen for making settings related to the embedded Ethernet (PCMC...

  • Page 359

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 333 - No. Chapter menu Description (13) BRD LOG (BOARD LOG) Selects the screen for displaying error messages related to the fast Ethernet/fast data server. * The items enclosed by parentheses on the second line under "Chapter menu" are disp...

  • Page 360

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Table 2.3.3 (g) Graphic (for dynamic graphic) No. Chapter menu Description (1) (6) (11) PARAM (PARAMETER) Selects the screen for setting drawing parameters. (2) EXEC (EXEC) Selects the screen for drawing tool paths. (3) EXEC (EXEC) Selects the screen ...

  • Page 361

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES 2.3.5 Warning Messages After a character or number has been input from the MDI panel, a data check is executed when key or a soft key is pressed. In the case of incorrect input data or the wrong operation a flashing warning message will be displayed...

  • Page 362

    2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Main board Channel 1 Channel 2 JA56AJA36ARS-232-CRS-232-CReader/puncherReader/puncherI/O CHANNEL=0or I/O CHANNEL=1I/O CHANNEL=2CNC This CNC has a total of two channels of reader/puncher interfaces. It also has a memory card interface. The input/outpu...

  • Page 363

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 2.OPERATIONAL DEVICES - 337 - 2.5 POWER ON/OFF 2.5.1 Turning on the Power Procedure of turning on the power Procedure 1 Check that the CNC or machine is visually normal. (For example, check that front door and rear door are closed.) 2 Turn on the power according to the ma...

  • Page 364

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 3 MANUAL OPERATION MANUAL OPERATION are eight kinds as follows : 3.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN ............................................................................. 364,338 3.2 JOG FEED (JOG) ..................................................

  • Page 365

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION XMIRRROR IMAGEYZCX2Y2Z2XYZPROGRAMSTOPM02/ M30MANUABSSPINDLEORITAPATCREADYNC?MC?ZERO POSITION Fig. 3.1 (b) Explanation - Automatically setting the coordinate system Bit 0 (ZPR) of parameter No.1201 is used for automatically setting the coordinate system....

  • Page 366

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 While a switch is pressed, the tool movesin the direction specified by the switch. Z X Y Fig. 3.2 (a) Jog Feed (JOG) Procedure for JOG feed Procedure 1 Press the jog switch, one of the mode selection switches. 2 Press the feed axis and direction select...

  • Page 367

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION 3.3 INCREMENTAL FEED In the incremental (INC) mode, pressing a feed axis and direction selection switch on the machine operator's panel moves the tool one step along the selected axis in the selected direction. The minimum distance the tool is moved is t...

  • Page 368

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 3.4 MANUAL HANDLE FEED In the handle mode, the tool can be minutely moved by rotating the manual pulse generator on the machine operator's panel. Select the axis along which the tool is to be moved with the handle feed axis selection switches. The minimum...

  • Page 369

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION Explanation - Availability of manual pulse generator in Jog mode (JHD) When bit 0 (JHD) of parameter No. 7100 is set to 1, both jog feed and manual handle feed can be used in JOG mode. When bit 0 (JHD) of parameter No. 7100 is set to 1, both manual handl...

  • Page 370

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 nmA B Pulses over (k⋅m) will be ignoredA: Amount of pulses the same as Rapid Traverse Rate. B: Amount of pulses saved in CNC. k : Integer number A+B=k⋅m Fig. 3.4 (c) Amount of pulses exceeding the Rapid Traverse Rate (n ≥ m) NOTE Due to chan...

  • Page 371

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION 3.5 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON AND OFF Whether the distance the tool is moved by manual operation is added to the coordinates can be selected by turning the manual absolute switch on or off on the machine operator's panel. When the switch is turned on, the distan...

  • Page 372

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - Manual operation after the end of block Coordinates when block <1> has been executed after manual operation (X-axis +20.0, Y-axis +100.0) at the end of movement of block <2>. X YSwitch ONSwitch OFFManualoperation(100.0 , 100.0)(200.0 , 150...

  • Page 373

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - When a movement command in the next block is only one axis When there is only one axis in the following command, only the commanded axis returns. ProgramN1 G90 G01 X100. Y100. F500 ;N2 X200.0 ;N3 Y150.0 ; X YSwitch ONSwitch OFFManualoperation(100.0 , 1...

  • Page 374

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 • Manual operation during cornering This is an example when manual operation is performed during cornering. VA2', VB1', and VB2' are vectors moved in parallel with VA2, VB1 and VB2 by the amount of manual movement. The new vectors are calculated from...

  • Page 375

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION • Manual operation after single block stop Manual operation was performed when execution of a block was terminated by single block stop. Vectors VB1 and VB2 are shifted by the amount of manual operation. Sub-sequent processing is the same as case a de...

  • Page 376

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 The timing chart for this procedures is given below. JOG ZRN +J1 Reference mark ZRF1 Feedrate FL rate FL rate FL rate Fig. 3.6.1 (a) Timing chart for reference position establishment - Procedure for establishing a reference position through aut...

  • Page 377

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION 3.6.3 Distance Coded Rotary Encoder In case of setting a rotary axis, if bit 3 (DCRx) of parameter No.1815 is set, the setting axis is regarded as being equipped with a distance coded rotary encoder. In case of distance coded rotary encoder, the marker in...

  • Page 378

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Reference position establishment with axis synchronization control axes With axis synchronization control axes, a reference position is established as follows. When a reference mark for the master or slave axis is detected, a stop takes place temporarily....

  • Page 379

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION 3.6.6 Angular Axis Control There are the following limitations when the angular axis control is used. (a) It is necessary to use the linear scale with the distance coded reference mark for both the perpendicular axis and the angular axis. (b) When the ref...

  • Page 380

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 (5) When the axis used this function, the following function can not be used. • Absolute position detection (bit 5 (APCx) of parameter No.1815 = 1) (6) If axial movement is made in the direction opposite to that of reference position return, the movemen...

  • Page 381

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION CNC Servo AmplifierSeparate Detector Interface Unit Table High Resolution Serial Output Circuit C Full Closed System Linear scale with distance-coded reference marks (serial) Max. 30m - Procedure for reference position establishment through manual ope...

  • Page 382

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 356 - If any of the following operations is performed during the operation of automatic reference position return (G28) before a reference position is not established, the operation for establishing a reference position stops: • Reset • Performing f...

  • Page 383

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION • When the reference point of the perpendicular axis is established, it is necessary to establish the reference point of the angular axis previously. When the reference point of the angular axis is not previously established, the alarm DS0020 occurs. ...

  • Page 384

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 358 - - Checking mode In this mode, the program can be executed forward and backward and the program can be checked. To change to the checking mode, it is necessary to change the mode to the memory mode (MEM mode), and the checking mode signal MMOD<...

  • Page 385

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 359 - Control with the manual handle The value of the parameter No.6410 and the scale factors decide the moving speed of the machine by one pulse generated by a manual handle. When a manual handle is turned, the actual movement speed of the machine i...

  • Page 386

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 360 - In 2 path control system, FIN signal must not be set to "1" when the block of M2 or M30 is executed in only one of paths. After the block of M2 or M30 has been executed in both paths, FIN signal is set to "1". (Except for the b...

  • Page 387

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION NOTE 1 In Small-Hole Pecking Drilling Cycle(G83) (M series), backward movement is prohibited. 2 In forward movement of Boring Cycle(G88) (M series), the sequence of actions at bottom of hole is shown as follows (dwell -> stop of spindle motor -> hol...

  • Page 388

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 362 - Forward movement Backward movement O0010 ; N1 G4 X1. ; N2 M101 ; M101 M100 (*1) N3 G4 X1. ; N4 M204 ; M204 M200 (*1) N5 G4 X1. ; N6 M104 ; M104 M101 (*2) N7 G4 X1. ; N8 M300 ; M300 M300 (*3) N9 G4 X1. ; N10 M200 ; M200 M204 (*2) N11 G...

  • Page 389

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION N6 N7 N8T33 output Forward movement : with T22 N6 N7N8T22 output Backward movement (When parameter STO is set to “0”) : N6 N7N8T33 outputBackward movement (When parameter STO is set to “1”) : T22 output - Direction change prohibition The d...

  • Page 390

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 • The block including backward movement prohibition G-code (which is not described in the paragraph "G-code") • The block which is executed while in modal including backward movement prohibition G-code (which is not described in the paragrap...

  • Page 391

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION Fig. 3.12 (b) " NO RVRS." status display Besides, when direction change prohibition signal MNCHG<F0091.1> is set to "1" and the direction of program’s execution is changed by manual handle, this status display changes from &q...

  • Page 392

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - Movement in subprogram operation by external subprogram call In M198 or M-code for subprogram operation by external subprogram call (parameter No.6030), the backward movement is prohibited though the forward movement is enable. - Movement command an...

  • Page 393

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 3.MANUAL OPERATION - Threading in forward movement Threading is always executed at 100% override speed. That is to say, a pulse generated by a manual handle is ignored in executing a threading block. In thread cutting cycle, the pulse is invalid at the time actually cuttin...

  • Page 394

    3.MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 368 - - Change in operation mode When you change to EDIT mode during the checking mode, the backward movement and the re-forward movement cannot be executed in the blocks which have been already executed. - ON/OFF of Manual Handle Retrace mode When c...

  • Page 395

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION 4 AUTOMATIC OPERATION Programmed operation of a CNC machine tool is referred to as automatic operation. This chapter explains the following types of automatic operation: 4.1 MEMORY OPERATION ................................................................

  • Page 396

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Memory operation Procedure T 1 For the 2-path control, select the path to be operated with the path selection switch on the machine operator's panel. 2 Press the MEMORY mode selection switch. 3 Select a program from the registered programs. To do this...

  • Page 397

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - Program stop (M00) Memory operation is stopped after a block containing M00 is executed. When the program is stopped, all existing modal information remains unchanged as in single block operation. The memory operation can be restarted by pressing th...

  • Page 398

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 MDI Operation Procedure 1 Select the MDI mode. T For the 2-path control, select the path for which a program is created and select MDI mode. A program is created for each path. 2 Press the key to select the program screen. The following screen appe...

  • Page 399

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION b. Terminating MDI operation Press the key. Automatic operation is terminated and the reset state is entered. When a reset is applied during movement, movement decelerates then stops. Explanation The previous explanation of how to execute and sto...

  • Page 400

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 374 - - Absolute/incremental command When bit 4 (MAB) of parameter No. 3401 is set to 1, the absolute/incremental programming of MDI operation does not depend on G90/G91. In this case, the incremental programming is set when bit 5 (ABS) of paramete...

  • Page 401

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION 2 Select the program to be executed. • Selecting a DNC operation file Enter the number of the file to be subjected to DNC operation is performed on the memory card (or floppy cassette) list screen with the keyboard and press soft key [DNC SET] (or [...

  • Page 402

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 4.3 (b) PROGRAM CHECK screen NOTE 1 Before selecting a DNC operation file, be sure to release all schedule data. DNC operation and schedule operation cannot be specified at the same time. 2 A DNC operation file cannot be released during DNC op...

  • Page 403

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION 4.4 SCHEDULE OPERATION To perform schedule operation, select files (programs) registered in a memory card and specify the sequence of execution and the repetition count of each program. Schedule operation Procedure 1 Press the REMOTE switch on the mac...

  • Page 404

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 4.4 (b) Schedule list screen (10.4-inch) [FILE UP] Moves the file at the cursor position up one line and moves the replaced file down one line. [FILE DOWN] Moves the file at the cursor position down one line and moves the replaced file up one ...

  • Page 405

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION Fig. 4.4 (c) File number screen (schedule list screen)(8.4-inch) Fig. 4.4 (d) File name screen (schedule list screen) (8.4-inch display unit) Fig. 4.4 (e) Soft key [F-NO] (8.4-inch display unit) Fig. 4.4 (f) Soft key [F-NAME] (8.4-inch displ...

  • Page 406

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 [F-NAME] Displays file name screen. The files registered as schedule data are marked with "S" to the left of their file names on the program list screen. Fig. 4.4 (g) Program list screen (after setting schedule data) (10.4-inch display u...

  • Page 407

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - Floppy disk directory display during execution of a file During schedule operation, directories in a floppy disk cannot be displayed in a background edit. - Intervention during automatic operation Intervention in schedule operation cannot be per...

  • Page 408

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Example) M198 P0123 L3 ; This command specifies that the subprogram having external subprogram number O0123 is to be called three times repeatedly. The subprogram is called from the main program and executed as follows: Main program Sub program ...

  • Page 409

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION NOTE 6 A call using the external device subprogram call function is counted as one level of subprogram nesting. 7 In a 2-path system (T series), an external device subprogram call cannot be performed simultaneously from both paths. 4.6 MANUAL HANDLE I...

  • Page 410

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 3 The feedrate during manual handle interruption is the sum of feedrate used for automatic operation and the feedrate used for movement by manual handle interruption. However, the feedrate during manual handle interruption is controlled so that it doe...

  • Page 411

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION 2 Even when manual handle interruption is performed, the machine coordinate system remains unchanged. The absolute command (G53) in the machine coordinate system is not affected by manual handle interruption. (G90G54****)(G90G53****)(Machine coordina...

  • Page 412

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 By cancellation, the workpiece coordinate system returns to the state present before handle interruption. (Machine zero point)Workpiececoordinate system after cancellation Workpiece coordinate system before cancellation Position after cancellation Inte...

  • Page 413

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION • Clearing any axis (there are the following two methods.) - Enter the axis name and then press [INTRPTCANCEL]. - Press soft key [INTRPTCANCEL], enter the axis name, and press soft key [EXEC]. If an incorrect axis name is entered, a warning message...

  • Page 414

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 388 - (b) OUTPUT UNIT : Handle interruption move amount in output unit system Indicates the travel distance specified by handle interruption according to the least command increment. (c) RELATIVE: Position in relative coordinate system Relative c...

  • Page 415

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION 4.7 MANUAL INTERVENTION AND RETURN When movement along an axis is stopped by feed hold during automatic operation, manual intervention is performed to check the cut surface, and a restart is made, then the tool returns to the position where it was befo...

  • Page 416

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 WARNING Be sure to perform correct intervention according to the machining direction and workpiece figure. Otherwise, the workpiece, machine, or tool may be broken. N2N1Point APoint B Return (non-linear interpolation type positionnin...

  • Page 417

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - Offset When the tool is broken, if the tool is replaced by manual intervention and then processing is restarted from the midpoint in the interrupted block, a change in the offset is not reflected. - Machine lock and mirror image When performing ma...

  • Page 418

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 2-3 Press the [SETING] soft key for chapter selection to display the setting screen. Fig. 4.8 (b) Setting screen 2-4 Move the cursor to the mirror image setting position, then set the target axis to 1. 3 Enter an automatic operation mode (memory mod...

  • Page 419

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION Procedure for program restart by specifying a sequence number Procedure 1 [P TYPE] 1 Retract the tool and replace it with a new one. When necessary, change the offset. (Go to step 2.) [Q TYPE] 1 When power is turned ON or emergency stop is release...

  • Page 420

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Procedure 2 [COMMON TO P TYPE / Q TYPE] 1 Turn the program restart switch on the machine operator's panel ON. 2 Press key to display the desired program. 3 Find the program head. Press key. 4 Enter the sequence number of the block to be restarted, th...

  • Page 421

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION T : Two most recently specified T codes S : Most recently specified S code B : Most recently specified B code Codes are displayed in the order in which they are specified. All codes are cleared by a program restart command or cycle start in the reset...

  • Page 422

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 5 The block number is searched for, and the program restart screen appears on the LCD display. Fig. 4.9 (b) Program restart screen DESTINATION shows the position at which machining is to restart. DISTANCE TO GO shows the distance from the current ...

  • Page 423

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 397 - Outputting the M, S, T, and B codes for program restart After the block to be restarted is searched for, you can perform the following operations: 1 Before the tool is moved to the machining restart position <1> The most recently specif...

  • Page 424

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 4.9 (c) Program restart screen (outputting M, S, T, and B codes) 2 Before the tool reaches the machining restart position, pressing soft key [OVERSTORE] selects the over store mode. In the over store mode, data can be entered in the M, S, T, a...

  • Page 425

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION 3 When values have been entered in the (OVERSTORE) section, pressing the cycle start switch outputs each code in the (OVERSTORE) section. The values in the (OVERSTORE) section are cleared. 4 To clear the values entered in the (OVERSTORE) section as M,...

  • Page 426

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 400 - - Block number when a program is halted or stopped The program screen usually displays the number of the block currently being executed. When the execution of a block is completed, the CNC is reset, or the program is executed in single-block ...

  • Page 427

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - Feed hold If a feed hold operation is performed during the search, the restart steps must be performed again from the beginning. - Manual absolute Every manual operation must be performed with the manual absolute mode turned on regardless of wheth...

  • Page 428

    4.AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 402 - - M, S, and T commands not usable in over store mode The M, S, and T functions listed below, unlike the other M, S, and T functions, have special meanings within the CNC. These M, S, and T commands cannot be specified from the over store scre...

  • Page 429

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 5.TEST OPERATION 5 TEST OPERATION The following functions are used to check before actual machining whether the machine operates as specified by the created program. 5.1 MACHINE LOCK AND AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK........................................................... 429...

  • Page 430

    5.TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Limitation - M, S, T, B command by only machine lock M, S, T and B commands are executed in the machine lock state. - Reference position return under machine lock When a G27, G28, or G30 command is issued in the machine lock state, the command is accept...

  • Page 431

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 5.TEST OPERATION 5.3 RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE An override of four steps (F0, 25%, 50%, and 100%) can be applied to the rapid traverse rate. F0 is set by a parameter No. 1421. A rapid traverse override can be selected in steps of 1% or 0.1% in the range of 0 to 100%. Rapid tr...

  • Page 432

    5.TEST OPERATION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Dry run Procedure Press the dry run switch on the machine operator's panel during automatic operation. The tool moves at the feedrate specified in a parameter. The rapid traverse switch (manual rapid traverse selection signal) can also be used for changing ...

  • Page 433

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 5.TEST OPERATION - 407 - Single block Procedure 1 Press the single block switch on the machine operator's panel. The execution of the program is stopped after the current block is executed. 2 Press the cycle start button to execute the next block. The tool stops after the ...

  • Page 434

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 6 SAFETY FUNCTIONS To immediately stop the machine for safety, press the Emergency stop button. To prevent the tool from exceeding the stroke ends, Overtravel check and Stored stroke check are available. This chapter describes emergency stop, overtravel c...

  • Page 435

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS 6.2 OVERTRAVEL When the tool tries to move beyond the stroke end set by the machine tool limit switch, the tool decelerates and stops because of working the limit switch and an OVER TRAVEL is displayed. Deceleration and stop Stroke endLimit switch Y X Fi...

  • Page 436

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 6.3 STORED STROKE CHECK Three areas which the tool cannot enter can be specified with stored stroke check 1, stored stroke check 2, and stored stroke check 3. Stored stroke check 1 Stored stroke check 2 Stored stroke check 3 : Forbidden area for the too...

  • Page 437

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - Stored stroke check 2 Parameters (Nos. 1322, 1323) or commands set these boundaries. Inside or outside the area of the limit can be set as the forbidden area. Parameter OUT (No. 1300#0) selects either inside or outside as the forbidden area. In case...

  • Page 438

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 If point A (the top of the tool) is checked in Fig. 6.3(d), the distance "a" should be set as the data for the stored stroke limit function. If point B (the tool chuck) is checked, the distance "b" must be set. A 点When a tool tip su...

  • Page 439

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 413 - - Releasing the alarms If the enters a forbidden area and an alarm is generated, the tool can be moved only in the backward direction. To cancel the alarm, move the tool backward until it is outside the forbidden area and reset the system. When...

  • Page 440

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 6.4 STROKE LIMIT CHECK BEFORE MOVE During automatic operation, before the movement specified by a given block is started, whether the tool enters the forbidden area defined by stored stroke check 1, 2, or 3 is checked by determining the position of the en...

  • Page 441

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS Explanation When a stroke limit check before moving is performed, whether to check the movement performed by a G31 (skip) block and G37 (automatic tool length measurement (M series) or automatic tool compensation (T series)) block can be determined using...

  • Page 442

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 416 - 6.5 WRONG OPERATION PREVENTION FUNCTIONS An improper tool offset setting or an improper operation of the machine can result in the workpiece being cut inadequately or the tool being damaged. Also, if data is lost due to an operation mistake, it t...

  • Page 443

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS For example, assume that the effective data range for a certain tool offset number is set to -200. to 200, and that you are going to input 100.[INPUT]. Even if you inadvertently press the 0 key one more time, resulting in 1000.[INPUT], the input of 1000....

  • Page 444

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 6.5.1.2 Confirmation of incremental input This function displays a confirmation message when you attempt to input an incremental value by using the [+INPUT] soft key. Confirmation of incremental input Explanation - Outline of the confirmation of increme...

  • Page 445

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - Input screens for which this function is effective • Tool compensation • Workpiece origin offset T • Y-axis tool offset • Workpiece shift - Settings In the operation confirmation function setting screen, check or uncheck the "DISABLED ...

  • Page 446

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 T • Y-axis tool offset - Settings In the operation confirmation function setting screen, check or uncheck the "ALL DATA DELETE" box to enable or disable this function. For information about how to display the setting screen, how to set the...

  • Page 447

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 421 - 6.5.2.1 Display of updated modal information This function allows modal information updated by the NC command or RESET to be highlighted in the modal information display for the current block. Display of updated modal information Explanation - O...

  • Page 448

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 ABSOLUTE M X1 10.000 Y1 10.000 Z1 0.000 By displaying the axis status as shown above, the function prevents improper operations at the time of execution. - Axis status indication The axis status is indicated as follows. These indic...

  • Page 449

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS 6.5.2.5 Data range check This function lets you set an effective data range and check whether the data to be used for execution is within the set range. Data range check Explanation - Outline of the data range check This function lets you set an effecti...

  • Page 450

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 6.5.2.7 Warning display during a reset in program operation When bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is 0, if a reset occurs during block execution in program operation, modal information returns to the state before block execution. This function display a...

  • Page 451

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS 6.5.3 Setting Screen This section describes how to display the operation confirmation function setting screen and how to set the individual data items on this screen. The operation confirmation function setting screen allows you to set the following items...

  • Page 452

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 6.5.3.1 (a) Operation confirmation function setting screen 5 In the operation confirmation function setting screen, the check box of each enabled function is checked (✓). Move the cursor to the check box of the item you want to set, by pressing...

  • Page 453

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS 6.5.3.2 Tool offset range setting screen This screen displays the setting status of tool offset effective data ranges and lets you change their settings. (Hereinafter, the screen is referred to as the tool offset range setting screen.) Up to 20 pairs of ...

  • Page 454

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 • Both the upper and lower limit values for the tool offset number are 0. • The upper and lower offset limit values are identical. Explanation - Control type The setting depend on the control type shown below. M • Tool offset memory A (bit 6 (NGW)...

  • Page 455

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 429 - Displayed item What to set LOW-LIMIT RADIUS UP-LIMIT Specify a valid tool offset value range for tool-nose radius in connection with a specified tool offset number range. NOTE The radius items are not displayed when tool-nose radius compensation ...

  • Page 456

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Displaying and setting the workpiece origin offset range setting screen Procedure 1 Press the function key. 2 Press the continuous menu key at the right edge of the screen several times until the [GUARD] soft key is displayed. 3 Click the [GUARD] soft k...

  • Page 457

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS Explanation - What to set for the workpiece origin offset For the workpiece origin offset, an effective data range is specified using the following four items. Displayed item What to set FROM RANGE TO Specify a workpiece coordinate system range. LOW-LIMI...

  • Page 458

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 6.5.3.4 (a) Y-axis tool offset range setting screen 5 Move the cursor to the item you want to set, by using the and keys, , , , and keys, or the [SWITCH] soft key. 6 Press the MDI key, enter necessary data, and then click the [INPUT] soft key. ...

  • Page 459

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS - 433 - Displayed item What to set LOW-LIMIT GEOM UP-LIMIT Specify a valid tool offset value range for geometry in connection with a specified Y-axis tool offset number range. LOW-LIMIT WEAR UP-LIMIT Specify a valid tool offset value range for wear in con...

  • Page 460

    6.SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 434 - • The upper and lower limit values are reversed. Also, the input data range check is invalidated in the following cases. • The upper and lower workpiece shift limit values are identical. Explanation - What to set for the workpiece shift For...

  • Page 461

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 7.ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS7 ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS When an alarm occurs, the corresponding alarm screen appears to indicate the cause of the alarm. The causes of alarms are classified by error codes and number. Up to 50 previous alarms can be stored a...

  • Page 462

    OPERATION B-64304EN/02 7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS Fig. 7.1(b) Display wrapping (example for the 8.4-inch display unit) 7.1.1 Operation - How to display the alarm screen In some cases, no switching occurs to the alarm screen, and “ALM” is displayed on the bottom of the current ...

  • Page 463

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 7.ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS - Releasing alarm The cause of an alarm can be determined from the error code, number, and associated message. To release the alarm, generally correct the cause, then press the reset key. - Error code and number The type of an alarm ...

  • Page 464

    OPERATION B-64304EN/02 7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS Fig. 7.1.2(b) 2-path display on the alarm display screen (10.4-inch display unit) NOTE If an arbitrary name is set (by parameters Nos. 3141 to 3147) for each path, the arbitrary name is displayed at the upper left of each split sc...

  • Page 465

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 7.ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS7.2 ALARM HISTORY DISPLAY Up to 50 alarms issued by the CNC including the latest alarm are stored and displayed on the screen. The display procedure is explained below. Alarm history display Procedure 1 Press the function key . 2 Press ...

  • Page 466

    OPERATION B-64304EN/02 7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS Fig. 7.2 (b) Alarm history screen (or a 2-path system, example of the 10.4-inch display unit) 7.3 CHECKING BY DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY The system may sometimes seem to be at a halt, although no alarm has occurred. In this case, the system ...

  • Page 467

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 7.ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS Fig. 7.3 (a) Diagnostic display (example for the 8.4-inch display unit) 7.4 RETURN FROM THE ALARM SCREEN 7.4.1 Return from the Alarm Screen When alarms are cleared or function key is pressed on the alarm screen, the screen displayed ...

  • Page 468

    OPERATION B-64304EN/02 7. ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS Switching between screens by the function key When function key is pressed on the alarm screen, the screen displayed before the alarm screen appears. Press function key to switch to the alarm screen for checking for alarms and then ...

  • Page 469

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION - 443 - 7.ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS<2> When switching to path 2 is performed on the alarm screen of path 1, the position screen of path 2 appears (when the screen last displayed in path 2 is the position screen). <3> When the message key is pressed on ...

  • Page 470

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64304EN/02 8 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Information stored in external I/O devices can be read into the CNC, and information can be written into external I/O devices. External I/O devices include memory cards that can be mounted to the memory card interface located on the l...

  • Page 471

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT CAUTION 1 This control unit supports the use of a Memory card as an input/output device. The Flash ATA card is available: See the order list for details of the supported Memory card types. 2 On a Memory card, only those files that are in the root dire...

  • Page 472

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64304EN/02 3 If a file with the same name exists on the memory card, soft keys [REWRITE] and [CAN] appear. Pressing the soft key [REWRITE] causes the file to be overwritten. Pressing the soft key [CAN] causes output to be canceled. Example) Output from the parame...

  • Page 473

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 8.2 INPUT/OUTPUT ON EACH SCREEN This section explains how to input and output data of the following types to and from each operation screen: program, parameter, offset, pitch error compensation, macro variable, workpiece coordinate system data, and opera...

  • Page 474

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64304EN/02 7 Press the soft key [EXEC]. This starts reading the program, and “INPUT” blinks in the lower right part of the screen. When the read operation ends, the “INPUT” indication disappears. To cancel the input of the program, press the soft key [CAN]....

  • Page 475

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 8.2.2 Inputting and Outputting Parameters 8.2.2.1 Inputting parameters Parameters are loaded into the memory of the CNC unit from an external device. The input format is the same as the output format. When a parameter is loaded which has the same data ...

  • Page 476

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64304EN/02 7 If all parameters are to be output, press the soft key [ALL]. If only the parameters with nonzero values are to be output, press the soft key [NON-0]. 8 Type the file name that you want to output. If the file name is omitted, default file name “CNC-P...

  • Page 477

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 8.2.3.2 Outputting offset data All offset data is output in a defined output format from the memory of the CNC to an external device. Outputting offset data Procedure 1 Make sure the output device is ready for writing. 2 Press the function key . 3 Press...

  • Page 478

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64304EN/02 • Tool compensation memory C (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No.8136 = 0) % G10 G90 L10 P01 R_ G10 G90 L11 P01 R_ G10 G90 L12 P01 R_ G10 G90 L13 P01 R_ G10 G90 L10 P02 R_ ... G10 G90 L12 P_ R_ G10 G90 L13 P_ R_ % L10 : Geometry compensation amount correspon...

  • Page 479

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT % G10 P01 X_ Z_ R_ Q_ Y_ G10 P02 X_ Z_ R_ Q_ Y_ ... G10 P__ X_ Z_ R_ Q_ Y_ G10 P10001 X_ Z_ R_ Y_ G10 P10002 X_ Z_ R_ Y_ ... G10 P100__ X_ Z_ R_ Y_ % P_: Tool compensation number (1 to the number of tool compensation pairs) Tool offset number: Tool wea...

  • Page 480

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64304EN/02 8 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 9 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 10 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [F INPUT] appears. Press the soft key [F INPUT]. 11 Type the name of the file that yo...

  • Page 481

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - Format Pitch error compensation data is output in the following format: N ***** Q0 P **** ; The 5-digit numeric value following N indicates a pitch error compensation data number to which a value of 10000 is added. Q0 indicates pitch error compens...

  • Page 482

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64304EN/02 7 Type the name of the file that you want to input. If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “MACRO.TXT” is assumed. 8 Press the soft key [EXEC]. This starts reading the custom macro common variables, and “INPUT” blinks in the l...

  • Page 483

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT NOTE The conventional custom macro statement program format cannot be used for output. By setting bit 0 (MCO) of parameter No. 6019, it is possible to output macro variable numbers and variable data values as comments after normally output data. The ou...

  • Page 484

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64304EN/02 3 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [WORK] appears. Press the soft key [WORK]. 4 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 5 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 6 Press the continuous menu key until soft...

  • Page 485

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 8.3 INPUT/OUTPUT ON THE ALL IO SCREEN Just by using the ALL IO screen, you can input and output programs, parameters, offset data, pitch error compensation data, macro variables, and workpiece coordinate system data. NOTE The ALL IO screen can be opera...

  • Page 486

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64304EN/02 [F-NAME] [O SET] Input file name Input program Input program number BLANK INPUT File for the program number specified with [O SET] All programs in the program specified with [O SET] Continuous program numbers starting at one specified with [O SET] INP...

  • Page 487

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 3 Press the MDI switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 4 Enter 1 in response to the prompt for “PARAMETER WRITE” in setting data. Alarm SW0100 appears. 5 Press the soft key [PARAMETER] on the ALL IO screen. 6 Press th...

  • Page 488

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Outputting offset data Procedure 1 Press the soft key [OFFSET] on the ALL IO screen. 2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 3 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 4 Press the soft key [F OUTPUT]. 5 Set the file n...

  • Page 489

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 463 - 5 Set the file name to be output. Type a file name, and press the soft key [F-NAME]. If the file name is omitted, default file name “PITCH.TXT” is assumed. 6 Press the soft key [EXEC]. This starts outputting the pitch error compensation data,...

  • Page 490

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 464 - 5 Set the name of the file that you want to input. Type a file name, and press the soft key [F-NAME]. If the input file name is omitted, default input file name “EXT_WKZ.TXT” is assumed. 6 Press the soft key [EXEC]. This starts reading the wo...

  • Page 491

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 8.4 MEMORY CARD SCREEN 8.4.1 Displaying the Memory Card Screen Procedure 1 Press the function key . 2 Press the soft key [DIR]. The program list screen appears. (If the soft key does not appear, press the continuous menu key .) 3 Press the soft key [(OPR...

  • Page 492

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 466 - UPDATE TIME The update date of the file is displayed. 8.4.2 Displaying and Operating the File List DIR + For the 8.4-inch display unit, the displays can be changed between the comment and the size/date. REFRESH Display data can be updated. F S...

  • Page 493

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 467 - 8.4.3 Inputting/Outputting a File A program can be input and output using the memory card screen. Inputting a program (F INPUT) 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 2 Press the soft key [(OPRT...

  • Page 494

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 468 - [F-NAME] [O SET] Input file name Input program Input program number INPUT INPUT File name set with [F-NAME] All programs in the file specified with [F-NAME] Continuous program numbers starting at one specified with [O SET] Outputting a file 1 Pr...

  • Page 495

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 3 Press soft keys [(OPRT)] and [DEVICE] in that order. The soft keys for selectable devices appear. 4 Pressing soft key [EMB ETH] displays the Embedded Ethernet host file list screen, on which a list of files in the host computer connected with the ...

  • Page 496

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Embedded Ethernet host file list screen (10.4-inch LCD) NOTE When using the FTP file transfer function, check that the valid device is the embedded Ethernet port. The two conditions below determine a connection destination on the host file list s...

  • Page 497

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 471 - CURRENT FOLDER C urrent work folder in the host computer FILE LIST I nformation of the files and folders in the host computer Operation list DEVICE (DEVICE CHANGE) Enables a device to be selected from the program folder screen. To select the em...

  • Page 498

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 472 - [F NAME] [O SET] Key input buffer Input file name Input program Input program No. – Warning message “NO PROGRAM SELECTED” is displayed, and nothing is input. Other than Oxxxx Warning message “THE WRONG DATA IS USED” is displayed, and no...

  • Page 499

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT NOTE 1 If a file is undergoing background editing, it is output. 2 The output file name consists of “O” followed by a 4-digit number. If a program whose program No. is 1 is output, for example, it is output under the file name “O0001” to the host...

  • Page 500

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 474 - FILE NAME The file name is displayed. 8.6.2 Displaying and Operating the File List F SRH A file can be searched for. The file found is displayed at the beginning of the list. 1 Press the soft key [F SRH]. 2 Enter the file number of a file to b...

  • Page 501

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 475 - 8.6.3 Inputting/Outputting a File A program can be input and output using the floppy cassette screen. Inputting a file 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel or enter state emergency stop. 2 Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 3 Pres...

  • Page 502

    8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 476 - [F-NAME] [O SET] Output file name Output program BLANK INPUT Program number set with [O SET] Program in the NC that is set with [O SET] INPUT BLANK File name set with [F-NAME] All programs in the program memory that are displayed in the program l...

  • Page 503

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 8.DATA INPUT/OUTPUT - 477 - - Canceling the hard copy function If the hard copy function is canceled before a hard copy is completed, an incomplete bit map file of data that has been output is created.

  • Page 504

    9.CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 9 CREATING PROGRAMS This chapter explains how to create programs by MDI of the CNC. This chapter also explains automatic insertion of sequence numbers and how to create programs in TEACH IN mode. Creation/registration Program creation EditingManagementE...

  • Page 505

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 9.CREATING PROGRAMS Explanation - Comments in a program Comments can be written in a program using the control in/out codes. Example) O0001 (TEST PROGRAM) ; M08 (COOLANT ON) ; • When the key is pressed after the control-out code "(", comments, and control-in...

  • Page 506

    9.CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 9 Press key. The EOB is registered in memory and sequence numbers are automatically inserted. For example, if the initial value of N is 10 and the parameter for the increment is set to 2, N12 inserted and displayed below the line where a new block is s...

  • Page 507

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 9.CREATING PROGRAMS Fig. 9.3 (a) Program screen in the TEACH IN JOG mode Inputting the coordinates of the current position You can use the following procedure to insert the coordinate of the current position along each axis in the absolute coordinate system: 1 Select th...

  • Page 508

    9.CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 4 Enter program number O1234 as follows: O1234 This operation input program number O1234 in memory. Next, press the following keys: An EOB (;) is entered after program number O1234. 5 Enter the P0 machine position for data of the first block as follo...

  • Page 509

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 9.CREATING PROGRAMS 9.4 CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING WITH GRAPHIC FUNCTION NC programs can be created on a block-by-block basis, viewing the displayed G code menu screen and G code details screen. Procedure for Conversational Programming with Graphic Function Procedure 1: C...

  • Page 510

    9.CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 9.4 (b) Program screen (with a program registered) 3 Key in the program number of a program to be registered after keying in address O, then press key. For example, when a program with program number 10 is to be registered, key in O10 , then pre...

  • Page 511

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 9.CREATING PROGRAMS 6 Press the soft key [BLOCK] to display a detailed screen for a keyed in G code. The figure below shows an example of detailed screen for G00. Fig. 9.4 (d) G code details screen (G00) When no keys are pressed, the standard details screen is displaye...

  • Page 512

    9.CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 486 - 11 After registering all programs, press the [PRGRM] soft key. The registered programs are converted to the conversational format and displayed. 12 Press the key to return to the program head. Procedure 2: Modifying a block 1 Move the cursor to...

  • Page 513

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS 10 EDITING PROGRAMS This chapter describes how to edit programs registered in the CNC. Editing includes the insertion, modification, and deletion of words. Editing also includes deletion of the entire program and automatic insertion of sequence numbers. ...

  • Page 514

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 4 Press the soft key [DIR+] to display a detailed program list. (Each time the soft key [DIR+] is pressed, the program list display switches between detailed display and normal display.) 5 Select a program whose edit disable attribute is to be removed. M...

  • Page 515

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS WARNING When a change, insertion, or deletion was performed on data of a program by pausing machining with the single block stop, feed hold, or other operations during execution of a program, be sure to return the cursor to the original position before...

  • Page 516

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Procedure for searching a word - Search using a soft key 1. Select EDIT or MEMORY mode. 2. Press function key . 3. Key in a word to be found. 4. Pressing soft key [SRH↓] makes a word search in the forward direction from the cursor position. 5. If the ...

  • Page 517

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS 2. Press function key . 3. Key in an address to be found. 4. Pressing cursor key makes an address search in the forward direction. 5. If the program includes the word containing the set address, the cursor moves to the word. If the word containing the s...

  • Page 518

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Method 2 1 Search for the program number. When the program screen is selected in MEMORY or EDIT mode, enter a program number. (Press address key O then type the program number.) 2 Press soft key [O SEARCH]. Method 3 1 Select the program screen or progr...

  • Page 519

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS 3 Key in data. 4 Press the key. Example of changing T15 to M15 1 Search for or scan T15. T15 is searched for/scanned. 2 Key in M 1 5 . 3 Press the key. T15 is changed to M15. 10.2.5 Deleting a Word Procedure for deleting a word 1 Search for or...

  • Page 520

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 10.3 DELETING BLOCKS A block or blocks can be deleted in a program. 10.3.1 Deleting a Block The portion from the current word position to the next EOB is deleted. The cursor is then placed in the word next to the deleted EOB. Procedure for deleting a ...

  • Page 521

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS N01234 is searched for/scanned. 2 Press . 3 Press the editing key . Blocks from N01234 to the EOB of a block which is two blocks ahead are deleted. 10.4 PROGRAM SEARCH When memory holds multiple programs, a program can be searched for. There are...

  • Page 522

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Upon completion of search operation, the found program number is displayed in the upper right area of the screen. If the desired program number is not found, the warning message "SPECIFIED PROGRAM NOT FOUND" is displayed when a 5-digit or lon...

  • Page 523

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS 2 Press function key . 3 If the program contains a sequence number to be searched for, perform the operations 4 to 7 below. If the program does not contain a sequence number to be searched for, select the program number of the program that contains the ...

  • Page 524

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Procedure for deleting one program 1 Select the EDIT mode. 2 Press function key to display the program screen. 3 Press address key . 4 Key in a desired program number. 5 Press the editing key . The program with the entered program number is deleted. ...

  • Page 525

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS 10.7 COPYING/MOVING PROGRAMS An entire program or a part of a program can be copied or moved. 10.7.1 Copying a Part of a Program A part of a program being displayed can be copied and pasted to another area. C B A B Before copy After copy Oxxxx Oyyyy Oxx...

  • Page 526

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Example 1) A part of O0001 is copied to O0002. 1. Display O0001 then move the cursor to a desired copy start position. (<1>) - 500 - 2. Press soft key [SELECT]. [SELECT] [PASTE] [SEL-ALL] [COPY] [CUT] 3. When the cursor is moved, the range from t...

  • Page 527

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS Example 2) A part of O0001 is copied to create O0003 newly. 1. Display O0001 then move the cursor to a desired copy start position. (<1>) [SELECT] [SEL-ALL] [COPY] 2. Press soft key [SELECT]. [CUT] [PASTE] 3. When the cursor is moved, the range f...

  • Page 528

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 10.7.2 Moving a Part of a Program 0.7.2 Moving a Part of a Program A part of a program being displayed can be cut and pasted to another area. C B A B Before move After move Oxxxx Oyyyy Oxxxx Oyyyy C A Fig. 10.7.2 (a) Moving a part of a program In Fig...

  • Page 529

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS Example 1) A part of O0001 is moved to O0002. 1. Display O0001 then move the cursor to a desired cut start position. (<1>) [SELECT] [SEL-ALL] [COPY] 2. Press soft key [SELECT]. [CUT] [PASTE] 3. When the cursor is moved, the range from the cut sta...

  • Page 530

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Example 2) A part of O0001 is cut to create O0003 newly. 1. Display O0001 then move the cursor to a desired cut start position. (<1>) [SELECT] - 504 - 2. Press soft key [SELECT]. 3. When the cursor is moved, the range from the cut start position ...

  • Page 531

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS 10.7.3 Copying an Entire Program An entire program can be copied and pasted to another area. A A Before copy After copy Oxxxx Oyyyy Oxxxx Oyyyy A Insertion position Fig. 10.7.3 (a) In Fig. 10.7.3 (a), the program of program number xxxx is inserted int...

  • Page 532

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Example) O0001 is copied and pasted to O0002. 1. Display O0001 then press soft key [SEL-ALL]. The entire program is selected and highlighted in the same color as the cursor color. (<1>) [SELECT] [SEL-ALL] [COPY] [CUT] [PASTE] - 506 - 2. Press soft...

  • Page 533

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS 10.7.4 Moving an Entire Program An entire program can be cut and pasted to another area. A A Before move After move Oxxxx Oyyyy Oxxxx Oyyyy A Insertion position Fig. 10.7.4 (a) In Fig. 10.7.4 (a), the program of program number xxxx is inserted into th...

  • Page 534

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Example) O0001 is cut and pasted to O0002. 1. Display O0001 then press soft key [SEL-ALL]. The entire program is selected and highlighted in the same color as the cursor color. (<1>) - 508 - 2. Press soft key [CUT]. 3. Display O0002 then move the...

  • Page 535

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS 10.7.5 Copy Specifying a Program Number An entire program can be copied to the current cursor position by specifying its program number. With this function, an entire program can be copied easily. Even when the size of a program exceeds the capacity of t...

  • Page 536

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 10.7.6 Copying/Moving to the Key-in Buffer The copy/move destination of a selected word is changed from the copy buffer to the key-in buffer. With this function, the user can perform editing while checking contents to be copied/moved. Procedure: Copying...

  • Page 537

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS 10.8 REPLACING A string in a program is replaced with a specified string. Procedure for replacing 1. Enter the EDIT mode or MDI mode (MDI screen). 2. Press the function key . 3. Press the soft key [(OPRT)]. 4. Press the continuous menu key until soft k...

  • Page 538

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 512 - 10.9 EDITING OF CUSTOM MACROS Unlike ordinary programs, custom macro programs are modified, inserted, or deleted based on editing units. Custom macro words can be entered in abbreviated form. Comments can be entered in a program. Refer to the III...

  • Page 539

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS to 0. Thus, protection of the programs of program numbers O9000 to O9999 can be canceled only when the correct keyword is set. A locked state means that the value set in the parameter PASSWD differs from the value set in the parameter KEYWD. The values s...

  • Page 540

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 CAUTION Once the locked state is set, parameter NE9 cannot be set to 0 and parameter PASSWD cannot be changed until the locked state is released or the memory all-clear operation is performed. Special care must be taken in setting parameter PASSWD. 10...

  • Page 541

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS Target of editing Fig. 10.11 (b) Simultaneous editing of 2-path programs screen (8.4-inch LCD) - Modes When both of path 1 and path 2 are placed in EDIT mode or MEM mode, the programs of both paths are simultaneously displayed on the program screen....

  • Page 542

    10.EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B-64304EN/02 If background editing is started when simultaneous 2-path program editing is enabled, background editing is started not only with the path for which operation is performed but also with the path not selected, and simultaneous 2-path program background ed...

  • Page 543

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 10.EDITING PROGRAMS - 517 - Fig. 10.12 (a) Compact-type MDI key input 6. When a soft key indicating the character to be input is pressed, the character is input to the key-in buffer. Explanation - Usable characters The following characters can be entered using soft keys...

  • Page 544

    11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64304EN/02 11 PROGRAM MANAGEMENT Program management functions are classified into the following two types: • Functions for devices • Functions for programs The functions for devices include selection and so on. The functions for programs include main program...

  • Page 545

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT 5 Press the soft key [DEVICECHANGE]. 6 Press the soft key for the desired device. 11.1.1 Selecting a Memory Card Program as a Device Overview By selecting a memory card including a program storage file (named "FANUCPRG.BIN") as a device, mem...

  • Page 546

    11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 520 - NOTE 2 This operation is enabled only in EDIT mode or MEM mode. When a memory card program is selected in the main programs of two paths in a 2-path control system, set the modes of both paths to EDIT mode or MEM mode. 3 If the default folder ...

  • Page 547

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT - External program number search / External workpiece number search A program on a program storage memory card can be searched for with the external program number search function or external workpiece number search function. - Main program search T...

  • Page 548

    11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64304EN/02 CAUTION 4 There are cases in which when a memory card is replaced with another, the CNC cannot detect the replacement. Thus, it is risky to replace a memory card without performing a "removal" operation, and this should never be attempted. ...

  • Page 549

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT 11.3 CHANGING PROGRAM ATTRIBUTES This section explains the procedure for changing the attribute of a program (edit disable, edit/display disable, or protection of data at eight levels). Procedure for selecting the attribute of a program 1 Select EDIT ...

  • Page 550

    11.PROGRAM MANAGEMENT OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 524 - 5 Press the soft key [O SEARCH]. A selection can also be made by pressing the cursor key . NOTE 1 Depending on the operation status and protection status, the main program cannot sometimes be selected. 2 The 8-level data protection function is...

  • Page 551

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 12 SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA To operate a CNC machine tool, various data must be set on the MDI panel for the CNC. The operator can monitor the state of operation with data displayed during operation. This chapter describes how to display an...

  • Page 552

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Screen displayed when the function key is pressed (for 8.4/10.4-inch display unit) ABS REL ALL HNDL (OPRT)Page 1 +(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Position display inthe workpiece coordinate system ⇒ See III-12.1.1Position display inthe workpie...

  • Page 553

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Page 2 RESTARTDIR (OPRT)+(6) (7) (8) (9) (10) Program restart ⇒See III-4.9 Program list screen ⇒See III-12.2.4 In the MDI mode PROGRMMDI CURRENTNEXT (OPRT)Page 1 +(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Editing programs ⇒See III-10 Pr...

  • Page 554

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 In the JOG/HND/REF mode PROGRM CURRENTNEXT (OPRT)Page 1 +(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Editing programs ⇒See III-10 Current block display screen ⇒See III-12.2.7Next block display screen ⇒See III-12.2.5 Page 2 RESTARTDIR (OPRT)...

  • Page 555

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA In the MDI mode PROGRAM MDI NEXT BLOCK (OPRT) Page 1 +(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Editing programs ⇒See III-10 Program screen for MDI operation⇒See III-12.2.3 Next block display screen ⇒See III-12.2.5 Page 2 RESTART DIR (OPRT...

  • Page 556

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Screen displayed when the function key is pressed (for 8.4-inch display unit) OFFSETSETTINGWORK (OPRT)Page 1 +(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Setting and displaying the tool offset value ⇒See III-2.1.1*1Displaying and entering setting data ...

  • Page 557

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Page 5 LANG. PROT. GUARD (OPRT)+(21) (22) (23) (24) (25) Displaying and switching the display language ⇒See III-12.3.8Protection of data at eight levels ⇒See III-12.3.9 Wrong operation prevention functions ⇒See III-6.5 Scre...

  • Page 558

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Page 3 Y OFFSET WORK SHIFT BARRIER (OPRT)+(11) (12) (13) (14) (15) Setting the Y-Axis offset⇒See III-2.1.6*1Setting the workpiece coordinate system shift value ⇒See III-2.1.5*1 Chuck and tail stock barriers ⇒See III-2.1.7*1 P...

  • Page 559

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Page 2 PITCH SV.SETSP.SET (OPRT)+(6) (7) (8) (9) (10) Displaying and setting pitch error compensation data ⇒See III-12.4.2Servo setting⇒See III-12.4.3Spindle setting ⇒See III-12.4.5 Page 3 W.DGNSALL IO OPEHIS (OPRT) +(1...

  • Page 560

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Page 5 COLORMAINTEM-INFO (OPRT) +(21) (22) (23) (24) (25) Color setting screen ⇒See III-12.4.8Periodic maintenance screen ⇒See III-12.4.11Maintenance information screen ⇒Maintenance manual B-64305EN Page 6 FSSB PRMSET (OPR...

  • Page 561

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Page 8 RMTDIAGM-TUN (OPRT) +(36) (37) (38) (39) (40) Machine remote diagnosis ⇒Fast Ethernet/Fast DataServer operator’s manual B-64414EN ⇒Machine remote diagnosis package operator’s manualB-63734EN Machining parameter tunin...

  • Page 562

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Screen displayed when the function key is pressed (for 10.4-inch display unit) PARAMETER DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (OPRT) Page 1 +(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Displaying and setting parameters ⇒See III-12.4.1Checking by diagnostic display ⇒See ...

  • Page 563

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Page 4 PMC MAINTE PMC LADDER PMC CONFIG P.MATE MGR. (OPRT) +(16) (17) (18) (19) (20) PMC diagnosis and maintenance screens ⇒Maintenance manual B-64305EN ⇒PMC Ladder Language Programming manual B-64393EN Ladder diagram monitor and...

  • Page 564

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Page 7 EMBED PORT PCMCIA LAN ETHER BOARD FL-net (OPRT) +(31) (32) (33) (34) (35) Embedded Ethernet functions ⇒Maintenance manual B-64305EN Embedded Ethernet functions ⇒Maintenance manual B-64305EN Ethernet functions ⇒Fast Eth...

  • Page 565

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Page 11 (51) (52) (53) (54) (55) PROFI MASTERPROFI SLAVE DEVNETMASTERDEVNET SLAVE (OPRT) + PROFIBUS-DPmaster functions ⇒PROFIBUS-DP Board connection manual B-64403EN PROFIBUS-DPslave functions ⇒PROFIBUS-DP Board connection manual...

  • Page 566

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 12.1 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY Section 12.1, "SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY ", consists of the following subsections: 12.1.1 Position Display in the Workpiece Coordinate System..............................................

  • Page 567

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Fig. 12.1.1 (a) Current position (absolute) screen (10.4-inch) Explanation - Presetting the workpiece coordinate system A workpiece coordinate system shifted by manual intervention or other operations can be preset by MDI operation to a wor...

  • Page 568

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 12.1.2 (a) Current position (relative) screen (10.4-inch) See Explanation for the procedure for setting the coordinates. Explanation - Setting the relative coordinates The current position of the tool in the relative coordinate system...

  • Page 569

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA At this time, the current position of the specified axis represented in relative coordinates are reset to 0. Presetting relative coordinates Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press chapter selection key [RELATIVE] to display the relative co...

  • Page 570

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 12.1.3 (a) Current position (overall) screen (10.4-inch) Explanation - Coordinate display The current positions of the tool in the following coordinate systems are displayed at the same time: • Current position in the relative coordi...

  • Page 571

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Procedure for the workpiece coordinate system preset Procedure - When all axes are preset 1 Press function key . 2 Press chapter selection key [ABSOLUTE] to display the absolute coordinate screen. 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. 4 Press soft key ...

  • Page 572

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 12.1.5 (a) Current position (absolute) screen (10.4-inch) - 546 - The actual feedrate is displayed in units of millimeter/min or inch/min (depending on the specified least input increment) under the display of the current position. Exp...

  • Page 573

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 547 - Table 12.1.5 (a) Unit display Actual feedrate Actual feed per revolution Inch (INI=0) MM/MIN MM/R Millimeter (INI=1) INCH/MIN INCH/R - Actual feedrate display switching condition Actual feedrate display is switched as shown in the ...

  • Page 574

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Procedure for displaying run time and parts count on the current position display screen Procedure 1 Press the function key to display a current position display screen. "PARTS COUNT", "RUN TIME", and "CYCLE TIME&quo...

  • Page 575

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 12.1.7 Operating Monitor Display The load meter for a servo axis can be displayed. Also, the load meter and speed meter for a serial spindle can be displayed. To enable this function, bit 5 (OPM) of parameter No. 3111 must be set to 1. Proced...

  • Page 576

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - Load meter The reading on the load meter depends on servo parameter No. 2086 and spindle parameter No. 4127. - Speedometer Although the speedometer normally indicates the speed of the spindle motor, it can also be used to indicate the spe...

  • Page 577

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Fig. 12.1.8 (a) The display of axes in 2-path system simultaneously (in the total position display screen) Explanation - Condition to display The display of axes in 2-path system simultaneously becomes effective when all conditions of 1-5 t...

  • Page 578

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 12.1.8 (b) The axes information is displayed in order in the 2nd -> 1st path (in the total position display screen) - 552 - Fig. 12.1.8 (c) The axes information is displayed in order in the 1st -> 2nd path (in the total position ...

  • Page 579

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - The order of displaying each axis The order of the axes displayed in the current position display screen can be specified (parameter (No.3130)). The order of the axes which can be specified is limited in order in each path. The order of the...

  • Page 580

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 554 - Fig. 12.1.8 (f) Specification of non-display of the axis - Display of axis with top-alignment To the area where the current position display becomes blank by being set as non-display, the current position is displayed w...

  • Page 581

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 12.2 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY Section 12.2, "SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY ", consists of the following subsections: 12.2.1 Program Contents Display.........................................................................

  • Page 582

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 12.2.1 (a) Screen for displaying the program being executed (full screen display) (10.4-inch) For the 10.4-inch display unit, if soft key [PROGRAM] is pressed again to switch screen display to full screen display or small screen display...

  • Page 583

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Displaying the program editing screen Procedure 1 Press function key to display the program screen. 2 Press chapter selection soft key [PROGRAM]. Editing operations such as text insertion, modification, and deletion, and cursor movements are...

  • Page 584

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 12.2.3 Program Screen for MDI Operation During MDI operation or editing of an MDI operation program in the MDI mode, the program currently being executed mode is displayed. For MDI operation, see Section III-4.2, “MDI Operation”. Procedu...

  • Page 585

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Fig. 12.2.4 (a) Program list screen (10.4-inch) 12.2.5 Next Block Display Screen The block currently being executed and the block to be executed next are displayed in the MEM mode and MDI model. Procedure for displaying the next block displ...

  • Page 586

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 NOTE 1 If a reset is made during execution of a program, the display of the current block and next block is cleared. 2 When the feed hold state (HOLD) is caused between the block and the block during the program execution, the next block displ...

  • Page 587

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - Display of the actual speed and SACT The actual speed is displayed with mm/min or inch/min according to unit of input. The actual spindle speed (SACT) is displayed. The simultaneous display of 2-path (for the 10.4-inch display unit) T The s...

  • Page 588

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 12.2.6 (c) The display of 1-path at program check screen (for the 8.4-inch display unit) Fig. 12.2.6 (d) The simultaneous display of 2-path at program check screen (for the 8.4-inch display unit) Load meter and speedometer display (fo...

  • Page 589

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 4 The display of spindle load meter and spindle speedometer changes to the display of the amount of the movement to be made and modal information on the program check screen. The display of the soft key changes from [D.GO] to [MONI]. Explanat...

  • Page 590

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 12.2.7 (a) Current block screen (8.4-inch) 12.2.8 Graphical Conversational Programming Screen The G code menu and details on G codes are displayed in the EDIT mode. A program can be created one block at a time while seeing the G code m...

  • Page 591

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Fig. 12.2.8 (a) Graphical conversational programming screen (G code menu screen) (10.4-inch) Fig. 12.2.8 (b) Graphical conversational programming screen (G code detail screen) (10.4-inch) The G code menu screen and G code detail screen ar...

  • Page 592

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 566 - 12.2.9 Background Editing Editing of a program other than the main program is called background editing. In background editing, a program can be edited during execution of another program and the same editing operations as normal edit...

  • Page 593

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Fig. 12.2.7 (a) Screen being edited in the background (editing mode) (10.4inch) Fig. 12.2.7 (b) Screen being edited in the background (reference mode) (10.4inch) - Editing status The following items are displayed on the program status lin...

  • Page 594

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - Operation in the background editing In the reference mode, a program being subject to background editing can be operated. - Switching to full display or small display For the 10.4-inch display unit, if soft key [PROGRAM] is pressed again ...

  • Page 595

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 5 Press soft key [EDIT EXEC] ([EDIT] for the 8.4-inch display unit). The program with the entered number is opened during background editing in the editing mode. If the program with the entered number is not present, a new program is created ...

  • Page 596

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 570 - 4 Change the device being displayed to the MEMCARD or data server. For changing a device, see III-11.1. 5 Move the cursor to the program to be opened for the background editing. 6 Press soft key [BG EDIT]. 7 Press [EDIT EXEC] ([EDIT ...

  • Page 597

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 12.3 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY Section 12.3, “SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY ”, consists of the following subsections: 12.3.1 Displaying and Entering Setting Data ...................................................................

  • Page 598

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 2 Press function key . 3 Press soft key [SETTING] to display the setting data screen. 4 This screen consists of several pages. Press page key or until the desired screen is displayed. An example of the setting data screen is shown below. ...

  • Page 599

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Explanation - PARAMETER WRITE Setting whether parameter writing is enabled or disabled. 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled - TV CHECK Setting to perform TV check. 0 : No TV check 1 : Perform TV check - PUNCH CODE Setting code when data is output th...

  • Page 600

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 12.3.2 Sequence Number Comparison and Stop If a block containing a specified sequence number appears in the program being executed, operation enters single block mode after the block is executed. Procedure for sequence number comparison and s...

  • Page 601

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA In the example shown above, if the predetermined sequence number is found, the execution of the program does not stop. - Stop in the canned cycle When the sequence number of the block in which the canned cycle command is present is found, th...

  • Page 602

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 576 - 5 To set the number of parts required, move the cursor to PARTS REQUIRED and enter the number of parts to be machined. 6 To set the clock, move the cursor to DATE or TIME, enter a new date or time, then press soft key [INPUT]. Explana...

  • Page 603

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Limitation - Run time and part count settings Negative value cannot be set. Also, the setting of “M” and “S” of run time is valid from 0 to 59. Negative value may not be set to the total number of machined parts. - Time settings Nei...

  • Page 604

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 6 Enter a desired value by pressing numeric keys, then press soft key [INPUT]. The entered value is specified in the workpiece origin offset value. Or, by entering a desired value with numeric keys and pressing soft key [+INPUT], the entered v...

  • Page 605

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Fig. 12.3.5 (a) WORK COORDINATES screen (10.4-inch) 6 Position the cursor to the workpiece origin offset value to be set. 7 Press the address key for the axis along which the offset is to be set (Z-axis in this example). 8 Enter the measured...

  • Page 606

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 12.3.6 (a) CUSTOM MACRO screen (10.4-inch) 3 Move the cursor to the variable number to set using either of the following methods: • Enter the variable number and press soft key [NO.SRH]. • Move the cursor to the variable number to s...

  • Page 607

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Procedure for displaying and setting the software operator’s panel Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press the continuous menu key , then press chapter selection soft key [OPERAT PANEL] ([OPR] for the 8.4-inch display unit). 3 The screen c...

  • Page 608

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 12.3.7 (c) Example 3: (10.4-inch) 4 Move the cursor to the desired switch by pressing cursor key or . 5 Push the cursor key or to match the mark to an arbitrary position and set the desired condition. 6 Press one of the following ar...

  • Page 609

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - Jog feed and arrow keys Parameters Nos. 7210 to 7217 are used to specify the correspondence between the arrow keys, axes, and movement directions. - Feed magnification of incremental feed The displayed item can be switched depending on wh...

  • Page 610

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 584 - Explanation - Language switching The language screen can be displayed if bit 0 (NLC) of parameter No. 3280 is set to 0. - Selectable languages The display languages selectable on this screen are as follows: 1. English 2. Japanese 3....

  • Page 611

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 12.3.9.1 Operation level setting You can set eight CNC and PMC operation levels. Displaying and setting the operation level setting screen Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press the continuous menu key several times until soft key [PROTECT...

  • Page 612

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 (The operation level also remains unchanged if the power is turned off.) Operation level 7 is reserved for CNC and PMC maintenance. NOTE When a password is being entered, an asterisk (*) is displayed instead of each entered character. 12.3....

  • Page 613

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA NOTE 1 For a password, consisting of three to eight characters, the following characters are available: • Uppercase alphabetic characters • Numeric characters 2 When a password is being entered, an asterisk (*) is displayed instead of each...

  • Page 614

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 12.3.9.3 (a) Protection level change screen (10.4-inch) 5 Move the cursor to the change level or output level of a desired data item. 6 Key in a new desired level, then press soft key [INPUT]. Explanation When the protection level of a...

  • Page 615

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 589 - Initial protection level Type of data Change Output Absolute coordinate preset operation <PRESET OF ABSOLUTE AXIS DATA> 0 0 Table 12.3.9.3 (b) Protection level of PMC data Initial protection level Type of data Change Output Comp...

  • Page 616

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Value RMS value 1 10 Precision level (RMS value: Root-Mean-Square value) Fig. 12.3.10 (a) Image of “level” Procedure for precision level selection 1 Select the MDI mode. 2 Press function key . 3 Press the...

  • Page 617

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 12.3.11 Displaying and Setting Tool Life Management Data Displaying tool life management data on a screen enables the current status of tool life management to be grasped. Also on the screen, tool life management data can be edited. The scre...

  • Page 618

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 12.3.11.1 Tool life management (list screen) This screen can display the life management status of all tools in tool groups and whether the life of the tool groups has expired. It also enables you to set tool life counters and clear execution...

  • Page 619

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 593 - - Contents of (A) (A) displays tool group numbers and an override value. If there is no tool group to display, ***, instead of tool group numbers, is displayed. NEXT GROUP: Tool group number for which life counting is started by the...

  • Page 620

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - Contents of (C) (C) displays tool group numbers for which a tool change signal has been issued. If there are so many tool group numbers that all the numbers cannot be displayed, some are omitted, and “>>” is displayed instead. If ...

  • Page 621

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA NOTE If arbitrary group numbers are enabled, a tool group is selected by searching for an arbitrary group number rather than the tool group number. Method 2 1 Press page key or to display desired groups. 2 Press cursor movement key or to...

  • Page 622

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 (A) (B) Fig. 12.3.11.2 (b) Displaying tool life management (group editing screen) (8.4-inch) NOTE 1 If no tool is registered with a tool group, none of a life count type, a life value, and a tool life counter value is displayed for the tool ...

  • Page 623

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA M H-CODE : Tool length compensation specification code D-CODE : Cutter compensation specification code T H-CODE : No display. D-CODE : No display. NOTE 1 The tool life counter indicates the count value for the tool indicated with @. 2 If bi...

  • Page 624

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 598 - Items that can be edited Mode Specifying to clear tool data (life re-set) MDI If no tool is registered with a tool group, none of a life count type, a tool life value, and a tool life counter value can be set for the tool group. Firs...

  • Page 625

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA (Example) Adding tool number 1550 between numbers 1 and 2 (for the M series) 1 Move the cursor to the data for number 1, enter “1550”, and press [INSERT]. 2 The entered T code 1550 is inserted in the position of number 2. The H and D ...

  • Page 626

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - Selecting a tool group A tool group can be selected as follows: Method 1 1 Enter a tool group number from the keypad. 2 Press soft key ['GRP.SRH]. - Switching to the list screen The tool life management (list screen) can be resumed as fol...

  • Page 627

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 601 - The custom macro screen (pattern data screen) shown below appears. Fig. 12.3.12 (b) Custom macro screen (pattern data) (10.4-inch) Enter the necessary pattern data, and press . After entering all necessary data, select the MEMORY mod...

  • Page 628

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 12.4 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY When the CNC and machine are connected, parameters must be set to determine the specifications and functions of the machine in order to fully utilize the characteristics of the servo motor or other parts...

  • Page 629

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Fig. 12.4.1 (a) PARAMETER screen (10.4-inch) 4 Move the cursor to the parameter number to be set or displayed in either of the following ways: • Enter the parameter number and press soft key [NO.SRH] . • Move the cursor to the parameter ...

  • Page 630

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 12.4.1 (b) SETTING screen (10.4-inch) 4 Move the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE using cursor keys. 5 Press soft key [(OPRT)], then press [ON:1] to enable parameter writing. At this time, the CNC enters the alarm state SW0100. 6 After setting...

  • Page 631

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA The pitch error compensation data is set according to the characteristics of the machine connected to the NC. The content of this data varies according to the machine model. If it is changed, the machine accuracy is reduced. In principle, the...

  • Page 632

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 • Pitch error compensation in the reference position when moving to the reference position from opposite to the reference position return direction (for each axis): Parameter No. 3627 Procedure for displaying and setting the pitch error com...

  • Page 633

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA • Enter the compensation point number and press the soft key [NO.SRH]. • Move the cursor to the compensation point number using the page keys, and , and cursor keys, , , , and . 5 Enter a value with numeric keys and press soft key [INPUT]...

  • Page 634

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Entering special data The settings of DIRECTION SET and DIRECTION REVERSE are entered with soft keys. Move the cursor to the item to be set and press the soft key of the data to be set. When soft key [(OPRT)] is displayed, press [(OPRT)] to di...

  • Page 635

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Setting data When all items are set and soft key [SET] is pressed, the CNC sets the CNC parameters to the calculated results. When a setting is illegal If a CNC parameter falls outside the setting range as a result of CNC internal calculatio...

  • Page 636

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 To display the servo setting screen for inputting machine constants again, press soft key [CHANGE] in the same procedure. At this time, the servo setting screen for inputting machine constants is displayed with the axis selected by the cursor...

  • Page 637

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 2 Press function key , continuous menu key , then soft key [SPINDL SETING]([SP.SET] for the 8.4-inch display unit). 3 Press soft key [SPINDL SETING] to select the spindle setting screen. The following screen appears: Fig. 12.4.5 (a) Spindle...

  • Page 638

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 12.4.5 (d) Soft keys displayed for MOTOR DIRECTION and POS. CODER DIRECTION (10.4-inch) NOTE It is also possible to input data with numeric keys and press soft key [INPUT] or MDI key [INPUT] to enter them. The soft keys to be displayed...

  • Page 639

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Displaying the spindle setting screen for inputting parameters Press soft key [(OPRT)] and continuous menu key to display soft key [CHANGE]. Press soft key [CHANGE] to display the spindle setting screen for inputting parameters. At this tim...

  • Page 640

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 12.4.6 (a) Spindle tuning screen (10.4-inch) 5 With the page keys and cursor keys, move the cursor to the position of data to be set or modified. 6 Key in a desired value then press soft key [INPUT]. 12.4.7 Spindle Monitor Spindle-rela...

  • Page 641

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Fig. 12.4.7 (a) Spindle monitor screen (10.4-inch) 12.4.8 Color Setting Screen Screen colors can be set on the color setting screen. Displaying the color setting screen Procedure 1 Press function key . 2 Press the continuous menu key sever...

  • Page 642

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Procedure for operating the color setting screen - Modifying the color (color palette values) 1 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The soft key display changes to the following operation soft keys: 2 Move the cursor to a color number whose color palet...

  • Page 643

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 617 - NOTE 2 Do not modify the color setting data parameters directly by MDI key input. When modifying the standard color data, be sure to perform a storage operation on the color setting screen. 12.4.9 Machining Parameter Tuning 12.4.9.1 M...

  • Page 644

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 12.4.9 (a) Machining parameter tuning screen (10.4-inch) 4 Move the cursor to the position of a parameter to be set, as follows: Press page key or , and cursor keys , , and /or to move the cursor to the parameter. 5 Key in desired da...

  • Page 645

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 619 - AI contour control Setting item Emphasis on velocity(LV1) Emphasis on precision (LV10) Unit Allowable acceleration rate <MAX AACELERATION> 2977.000 596.000 mm/sec2Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation &...

  • Page 646

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 NOTE This setting item is displayed only when the jerk control function is enabled. - Allowable acceleration change value for each axis in velocity control based on acceleration change under jerk control in successive linear interpolation ...

  • Page 647

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - Allowable acceleration rate Set an allowable acceleration rate in acceleration-based speed determination. Unit of data: mm/sec2, inch/sec2, deg/sec2 (machine unit) The parameter set on the machining parameter tuning screen is reflected in...

  • Page 648

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - Arbitrary items Two arbitrary parameters can be registered. Each item can correspond to a CNC parameter or servo parameter. A parameter number corresponding to each item is to be specified with parameters. As indicated below, set the param...

  • Page 649

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA On this screen, the parameter sets for emphasis on precision (smoothing level 1) and emphasis on surface smoothing (smoothing level 10) can be set. Set the following parameters: • Tolerance For details of each parameter, see the descriptions...

  • Page 650

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Unit of data: mm, inch, degree (input unit) The parameter set on the machining parameter tuning screen (smoothing) is reflected in the following parameters: Parameter No. 11682 (smoothing level 1) Parameter No. 11683 (smoothing level 10) Mor...

  • Page 651

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Displaying the menu screen and selecting a setting screen Procedure 1 Set the MDI mode. 2 Switch the setting of "PARAMETER WRITE" to "ENABLED". For details, see the procedure for "PARAMETER WRITE" in Subsection II...

  • Page 652

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 12.4.10.1 (b) Axis setting screen (10.4-inch) 2 Press the continuous menu key several times. 3 Press soft key [MENU]. The screen display returns to the parameter setting support menu screen. 4 Upon completion of parameter setting, swi...

  • Page 653

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - Items displayed with [TUNING] The items of [TUNING] indicate the screens for servo, spindle, and high-speed high-precision machining tuning. Fig. 12.4.10.1 (b) Items displayed with [TUNING] Display item Description SERVO TUNING Servo tunin...

  • Page 654

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 12.4.10.2 (a) Parameter setting support screen (axis setting) (10.4-inch) 3 Move the cursor to a parameter number to be set or displayed, according to one of the methods below. • Enter the parameter number and press soft key [NO.SRH] ...

  • Page 655

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 12.4.10.3 Displaying and setting the FSSB amplifier setting screen From the parameter setting support screen, the FSSB amplifier setting screen can be displayed. For details of the FSSB amplifier setting screen, see the description of the FSSB...

  • Page 656

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 12.4.10.4 Displaying and setting the FSSB axis setting screen From the parameter setting support screen, the FSSB axis setting screen can be displayed. For details of the FSSB axis setting screen, see the description of the FSSB axis setting s...

  • Page 657

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 12.4.10.6 Displaying and setting the servo setting screen Servo-related parameters can be displayed or changed. The CNC parameters of servo current control, speed control, position control, and backlash acceleration can be displayed or changed...

  • Page 658

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 12.4.10.6 (c) Servo parameter screen (display for each item) (10.4-inch) Setting the servo parameter screen Procedure 1 On the setting screen, confirm PARAMETER ENABLE SWITCH ON. 2 Press soft key [AXIS] several times to select the axi...

  • Page 659

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Fig. 12.4.10.7 (a) Servo gain tuning screen (automatic tuning screen) (10.4-inch) Fig. 12.4.10.7 (b) Servo gain tuning screen (manual tuning screen) (10.4-inch) Display item VELOCITY GAIN The value calculated by the CNC with the following ...

  • Page 660

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 VEL. GAIN TUN. STATUS The automatic tuning status is displayed. The automatic tuning status is indicated by one of the following four states: "tuning finished", which indicates that automatic tuning is completed, "tuning not fi...

  • Page 661

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - All axis tuning When [ALL AX] is pressed on the automatic tuning screen, the following soft keys are displayed and SERVO GAIN TUNING (AUTO-TUN. ALL AXES) is indicated on the title bar of the screen. Fig. 12.4.10.7 (d) Automatic tuning scre...

  • Page 662

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 For example, in the conditions shown in the above figure, automatic tuning starts with the X-axis and, when the X-axis is completed, the cursor moves to the Z-axis; then automatic tuning stops. If soft key [ONE AX TUNING] is pressed again at ...

  • Page 663

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA NOTE A clear operation in the tuning completion state does not clear the VEL. GAIN TUN. STATUS indication of the axis in the INIT. ERR state. To clear the INIT. ERR state, change the setting of VELOCITY GAIN, CUT DVR, or H. SP HRV on the m...

  • Page 664

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 When soft key [TUNING START] is pressed during selected axis tuning, the axis selected by the cursor is subjected to automatic tuning. At this time, automatic tuning is performed again regardless of the tuning status of the selected axis. Fo...

  • Page 665

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA NOTE A clear operation in the tuning completion state does not clear the VEL. GAIN TUN. STATUS indication of the axis in the INIT. ERR state. To clear the INIT. ERR state, change the setting of VELOCITY GAIN, CUT DVR, or H. SP HRV on the m...

  • Page 666

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 12.4.10.7 (g) Selected axis being tuned (10.4-inch) When soft key [TUNING STOP] is pressed at this time, automatic tuning is forcibly stopped even during automatic tuning. It is also possible to forcibly stop automatic tuning by pressi...

  • Page 667

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Fig. 12.4.10.7 (h) Servo gain tuning screen (manual tuning screen) (10.4-inch) NOTE If any axis is being subjected to automatic tuning, [MANUAL TUNING] is not displayed on the automatic tuning screen. Accordingly, the manual tuning screen c...

  • Page 668

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 642 - - Caution Reset If the RESET key is pressed or external reset signal ERS<Gn008.7> or reset & rewind signal RRW<Gn008.6> is input during automatic tuning, automatic tuning is stopped. VEL. GAIN TUN. STATUS "INIT. ...

  • Page 669

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Fig. 12.4.10.8 (a) High-precision setting screen (display for each axis) (10.4-inch) Fig. 12.4.10.8 (b) High-precision setting screen (display for each item) (10.4-inch) Screen display is switched between display for each axis and display ...

  • Page 670

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 12.4.10.9 Displaying and setting the spindle setting screen The parameters related to spindles can be displayed or changed. For the display and setting methods, see "Parameter setting support screen (axis setting)" earlier. Fig. 12...

  • Page 671

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 12.4.10.11 Displaying and setting the servo tuning screen From the parameter setting support screen, the servo tuning screen can be displayed. For details of the servo tuning screen, see the description of the servo tuning screen in Subsection...

  • Page 672

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 12.4.10.13 Displaying and setting the machining parameter tuning screen From the parameter setting support screen, the machining parameter tuning screen can be displayed. For details of the machining parameter tuning screen, see the descripti...

  • Page 673

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 647 - Table 12.4.10.13 (b) Parameters displayed for parameter setting support (2) Menu Group Parameter No. NameBrief description AXIS SETTING BASIC 1001#0 INM Least command increment on linear axes: 0:Metric (millimeter machine) 1:Inch (inc...

  • Page 674

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 648 - Table 12.4.10.13 (c) Parameters displayed for parameter setting support (3) Menu Group Parameter No. NameBrief description AXIS SETTING SPINDLE 3716#0 A/S Sets the type of spindle motor: 0:Analaog / 1:Serial. 3717 Spindle amplifier ...

  • Page 675

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 12.4.11 Periodic Maintenance Screen Periodic maintenance screens are used for managing consumables (such as the backlight of a LCD unit and backup batteries). By setting the name of a consumable, its life time, and the method for counting down...

  • Page 676

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Status screen When soft key [STATUS] is pressed, the status screen is displayed. The status screen shows the item names, count statuses, and remaining times of managed consumables. Fig. 12.4.11 (a) Status screen (10.4-inch) - Item name As ...

  • Page 677

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 651 - NOTE 1 An asterisk "*" is used as a control code, so it cannot be used in item names. In addition, characters "[", "]", "(", and ")" cannot be used in item names. 2 When an item name co...

  • Page 678

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 12.4.11 (b) Setting screen Display procedure 1 When the status screen is displayed, press soft key [(OPRT)]. 2 Press soft key [CHANGE]. - Life time Set the life time of a consumable. Move the cursor to an existing item, type a life ti...

  • Page 679

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA NOTE 1 If a setting operation is attempted when the item name or life time is not registered, the warning “EDIT REJECTED” is issued. 2 When a value exceeding the valid range is entered, the warning “DATA IS OUT OF RANGE” is issued. 3 I...

  • Page 680

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - Displaying the screen 1 When the status screen is displayed, press soft key [MACHINE]. On the machine menu screen, item names can be registered using one of the following two methods: • Registration from a program • Registration using ...

  • Page 681

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA To delete a registered item name, move the cursor to the item name, press soft key [ERASE], then press soft key [EXEC]. NC menu screen On the NC menu screen, the names of NC consumables are registered. From this screen, an item name can be r...

  • Page 682

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 12.4.12 (a) System configuration screen Hardware configuration screen This screen shows the names and IDs of the hardware used by the NC. Fig. 12.4.12 (b) Hardware configuration screen Software configuration screen This screen shows ...

  • Page 683

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Fig. 12.4.12 (c) Software configuration screen Servo information screen When a servo system is connected to the NC, ID information of the connected servo devices (servo motors and servo amplifier modules) can be displayed on the NC. Display...

  • Page 684

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 658 - Fig. 12.4.12 (e) Spindle information screen 12.4.13 Overview of the History Function The history function records the operations performed by the operator, alarms that occurred, and external operator messages and checks their history...

  • Page 685

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 659 - 12.4.13.1 Alarm history The alarm generated in CNC is recorded. The alarm of 50 times is recorded, and it is displayed from the new one sequentially. If the amount of alarm history data exceeds 50 items, alarm history data is automatic...

  • Page 686

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 660 - Erasing alarm history data from the alarm history screen Procedure 1 Display the alarm history screen. 2 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. 3 Press soft key [CLEAR]. Alarm history data is then erased. Display of external alarms and macro alarms...

  • Page 687

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 661 - 12.4.13.2 External operator message history External operator message can be stored as history. And, stored history can be seen on the external operator message history screen. Fig. 12.4.13.2 (a) External operator message history scr...

  • Page 688

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 662 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3113 MS1 MS0 HMC [Data type] Bit #0 HMC The contents of the external operator message history: 0: Cannot be erased. 1: Can be erased. #6 MS0 #7 MS1 Set the combination of the number of charact...

  • Page 689

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 663 - c Data modification history i Modification of tool offset data (When bit 0 (HTO) of parameter No. 3196 is set to 1) ii Modification of workpiece offset data/extended workpiece offset data/workpiece shift (T series) (When bit 1 (HWO) of...

  • Page 690

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 664 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3195 EKE HDE HKE [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #5 HKE A key operation history is: 0: Recorded. 1: Not recorded. #6 HDE A DI/DO history is: 0: Recorded. 1: Not recorded. #7 EKE ...

  • Page 691

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 665 - [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 1 to the maximum number of G code groups Set the number of a G code modal group to be recorded in the alarm history and operation history when an alarm is issued. * If a value beyond the valid ...

  • Page 692

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 12996 (7th) G code modal group to be recorded in the history when an alarm is issued [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 1 to the maximum number of G code groups Set the number of a G code modal group to b...

  • Page 693

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA a [TOP] displays the starting page (the oldest data). b [BOTTOM] displays the end page (the latest data). c [NO.SRH] displays specified operation history data. (Example) Specifying 50 then [NO.SRH] displays the 50th data. Fig. 12.4.13.3 ...

  • Page 694

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 • I/O signals When bit 6 (HDE) of parameter No. 3195 is set to 0, I/O signals specified on the operation history signal selection screen are recorded. Recorded signals are indicated on a bit-by-bit basis with information about the signal ad...

  • Page 695

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 669 - History data not displayed on the screen In addition to history data of MDI keys, I/O signal status, alarms issued, external operator messages (not displayed on the operation history screen), and time stamps, data described below can b...

  • Page 696

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Erasing history data from the operation history screen Procedure 1 Display the operation history screen. 2 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. 3 Press soft key [ALL CLEAR]. 4 Press soft key [EXEC]. Operation history data is erased. 12.4.13.4 Selecting ...

  • Page 697

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 4 Press soft key [EXEC]. Clearing the selection of all signals 1 Display the operation history signal selection screen. 2 Press soft key [ALLDEL]. 3 Press soft key [EXEC]. Fig. 12.4.13.4 (a) Operation history signal selection screen Select...

  • Page 698

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 672 - 1: Interacts with parameters. Operation history signal selection can be performed either on the operation history signal selection screen or by setting parameters. NOTE Setting this parameter to 1 reflects the current operation hist...

  • Page 699

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 673 - 12841 Operation history signal selection address number (No.01) to to 12860 Operation history signal selection address number (No.20) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] For an explanation of the addr...

  • Page 700

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 674 - NOTE 2 If the value of the address type (Nos. 12801 to 12820) corresponding to that signal is 0, a warning, "DATA IS OUT OF RANGE" appears; retry setting a value. 12.4.13.5 Outputting all history data All history data (opera...

  • Page 701

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 675 - <Example> • Alarm 01_SR01973 *G0. G97. G69. G99. G21. G50.2 G25. G13.1 B0. D0. E0. *F100. H0. M10. *N123. Test_ S1000. T1010. X1 ABS 197.999 MCN 197.999 Y1 ABS -199806.00 MCN -199806.00 Z1 ABS 297.009 MCN 0.123 C1 ABS 10395.99...

  • Page 702

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 676 - Work Shift (X) 02_999999.999 → 999999.999 at 10:22:37 7 Modification of parameters After "Parameter", "type", "parameter-number", "parameter-before-modification", "parameter-after-modifi...

  • Page 703

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Example of output - 677 - =============== ALARM HISTORY =============== Alarm 01_MC03001 Message MACRO ALRM at 2000/01/23 12:34:04 Alarm 01_SR01973 at 2000/01/23 12:34:11 ========= OPERATION MESSAGE HISTORY ========...

  • Page 704

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 12.5 SCREENS DISPLAYED BY FUNCTION KEY Function key can be pressed to display alarms, alarm history, operator messages, or external operator message history, etc. For alarms, see III-7.1. For alarm history and external operator message his...

  • Page 705

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 12.6.2 Displaying the Status and Warning for Data Setting or Input/Output Operation The current mode, automatic operation state, alarm state, and program editing state are displayed on the next to last line on the screen allowing the operator ...

  • Page 706

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 680 - (4) State in which an auxiliary function is being executed FIN : Indicates the state in which an auxiliary function is being executed. (Waiting for the complete signal from the PMC) *** : Indicates a state other than the above. (5) ...

  • Page 707

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA WOFS : Indicates that the workpiece origin offset amount measurement mode is set. AICC 1 : Indicates that operation is being performed in the AI contour control mode. (M series only, parameters Nos.3241 to 3247) AI APC : Indicates that operati...

  • Page 708

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 12.7 SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION AND AUTOMATIC SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION Overview Keeping the same characters displayed in the same positions on the screen for a long time will shorten the life of the LCD. To prevent this, the CNC screen can be eras...

  • Page 709

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Parameter 3123 Time required before a screen saver is activated [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Byte path [Unit of data] min [Valid data range] 0 to 127 After a time (in minutes) set in parameter No. 3123 passes without key opera...

  • Page 710

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 12.8.1.(a) Spindle load meter and spindle speed meter Switching between screens To display the spindle load meter and spindle speed meter, press soft key [MONI]. To switch between the remaining distance and modal information, press sof...

  • Page 711

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA NOTE To use spindle load meter display and spindle speed meter display, the serial spindle is necessary. T 12.8.2 For the 10.4-Inch Display Unit To display the servo load meter and spindle load meter on the screen of the 10.4-inch display...

  • Page 712

    12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 12.8.2 (b) Spindle load meter Switching between screens To display the servo load meter or spindle load meter, press soft key [MONITOR] at the bottom of the screen. The default is the servo load meter. Pressing soft key [MONITOR] swit...

  • Page 713

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 12.SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA - 687 - T #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3192 PLD [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit # 7 PLD On the screen of the 10.4-inch display unit where positional display is performed on the left half, the function for displaying t...

  • Page 714

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 13 GRAPHIC FUNCTION Chapter 13, "GRAPHIC FUNCTION", consists of the following sections: 13.1 GRAPHIC DISPLAY ....................................................................................................................... 714,688 13.2 D...

  • Page 715

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION M - Graphic parameter screen (first page) Fig. 13.1.1 (a) Graphic parameter screen (first page) (8.4-inch LCD) Fig. 13.1.1 (b) Graphic parameter screen (first page) (10.4.4-inch LCD) On graphic parameter screen (first page) , a graphic coordinate sy...

  • Page 716

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - Graphic parameter screen (second page) Fig. 13.1.1 (c) Graphic parameter screen (second page) (8.4-inch LCD) Fig. 13.1.1 (d) Graphic parameter screen (second page) (10..4-inch LCD) On the graphic parameter screen (second page), a drawing end block...

  • Page 717

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - Graphic parameter screen (third page) Fig. 13.1.1 (e) Graphic parameter screen (third page) (8.4-inch LCD) Fig. 13.1.1 (f) Graphic parameter screen (third page) (10.4-inch LCD) On graphic parameter screen (third page), coordinate axes to be used f...

  • Page 718

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 T - Graphic parameter screen (first page) Fig. 13.1.1 (g) Graphic parameter screen (first page) (8.4-inch LCD) Fig. 13.1.1 (h) Graphic parameter screen (first page) (10.4-inch LCD) On the graphic parameter screen (first page), blank dimensions (leng...

  • Page 719

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - Graphic parameter screen (second page) Fig. 13.1.1 (i) Graphic parameter screen (second page) (8.4-inch LCD) Fig. 13.1.1 (j) Graphic parameter screen (second page) (10.4-inch LCD) On graphic parameter screen (second page), graphic colors are set. ...

  • Page 720

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - Graphic parameter screen (third page) Fig. 13.1.1 (k) Graphic parameter screen (third page) (8.4-inch LCD) Fig. 13.1.1 (l) Graphic parameter screen (third page) (10.4-inch LCD) On graphic parameter screen (third page), coordinate axes to be used f...

  • Page 721

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - Moving the cursor The cursor can be moved to a desired parameter by the page key or and the cursor key , , , or . With the cursor keys, however, you cannot move from page 1 or 2 to page 3. - Input of settings (absolute input) Method 1 (1) Key in a...

  • Page 722

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - Graphic coordinate system M Select a desired graphic coordinate system for tool path drawing then set the corresponding number. Y X 0. XY ZY1. YZYZ 2. ZY Z X 3. XZ 4. XYZZXY5. ZXY YZ X Fig. 13.1.1 (m) Graphic coordinate system T Select a desired gr...

  • Page 723

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION Setting value = 0 or 10 Z X2 X1 Setting value = 1 or 11ZX2X1Setting value = 2 or 12 Z X1X2Setting value = 3 or 13 Z X2 X1 Setting value = 4 or 14ZX2X1Setting value = 5 or 15 Z X1 X2 Setting value = 6 or 16 Z X2 X1 Setting value = 7 or 17ZX2X1Setting val...

  • Page 724

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 1. Method by setting the maximum and minimum values of coordinate positions Set the desired graphic range by the maximum and minimum coordinate values in the workpiece coordinate system. Drawing is performed so that the entire set range falls within the...

  • Page 725

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION 2. Method by setting the graphic range center and scale factor Set the central coordinates of the drawing area by coordinate values in the workpiece coordinate system. Next, set the scale factor to make the graphic range fall within the drawing area. S...

  • Page 726

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 210° YX ZX’Y’ Horizontal rotationplane Fig. 13.1.1 (p) Coordinate system rotation in horizontal direction - Vertical rotation angle When a three-dimensional coordinate system such as 4.XYZ or 5.ZXY is selected, the coordinate system can be rotat...

  • Page 727

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION 13.1.2 Path Graphic Screen Explanation Press the function key (or when a small MDI unit is used) and then press the [GRAPH] soft key to display the PATH GRAPHIC screen. The PATH GRAPHIC screen mainly consists of three parts. • Drawing area part for ...

  • Page 728

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 T Fig. 13.1.2 (c) PATH GRAPHIC screen (8.4-inch LCD) Fig. 13.1.2 (d) PATH GRAPHIC screen (10.4-inch LCD) - 702 -

  • Page 729

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION T - Screen for simultaneously displaying two paths (Two-path lathe system) Fig. 13.1.2 (e) PATH GRAPHIC screen (8.4-inch LCD) Fig. 13.1.2 (f) PATH GRAPHIC screen (10.4-inch LCD) - Screen for displaying a single path When you set bit 2 (DOP) of param...

  • Page 730

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Even if a tool position changes discontinuously due to origin setting and switching of the workpiece coordinate system, the tool path is drawn assuming that the tool moves. Tool path drawing continues even after you switch to another screen. NOTE Drawi...

  • Page 731

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - Stopping drawing 1 Press the function key (or when a small MDI unit is used). If the PATH GRAPHIC screen does not appear, press the [GRAPH] soft key to display the screen. 2 Tool path drawing stops when automatic operation has completed or is stoppe...

  • Page 732

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 4 After step 3 described above, press the [AREA] soft key. Two cursors, one in red and the other in yellow, appear at the center of the screen, and the soft key display is changed. 5 Move the yellow cursor by using the cursor key , , , or . The cursor to...

  • Page 733

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION Automatic operation Operation performed for actual machining Background operation Virtual operation performed for drawing 13.2.1 Path Drawing Overview The following tool path drawing screens are used to make various settings and execute drawing: • PA...

  • Page 734

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 13.2.1.1 (b) PATH GRAPHIC (SETTING-1) screen (first page) (10.4-inch LCD) Fig. 13.2.1.1 (c) PATH GRAPHIC (SETTING-2) screen (first page) (8.4-inch LCD) - 708 -

  • Page 735

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION Fig. 13.2.1.1 (d) PATH GRAPHIC (SETTING-2) screen (first page) (10.4-inch LCD) 2 Two screens are used for the PATH GRAPHIC (SETTING) screen. Use the MDI page keys to switch between the screens for display of a desired setting item. 3 Use the MDI curso...

  • Page 736

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 710 - - Scale (SCALE) Set the scale factor for drawing in the range of 0.01 to 100.00 (times). With a small scale factor, it is possible to draw within a wide range. With a large scale factor, it is possible to draw in the vicinity of the graphic cent...

  • Page 737

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - Graphic color (GRAPHIC COLOR) Set colors to be used for tool path drawing. The colors that can be set are indicated below together with their setting values: Graphic color White Red Green Yellow Blue Purple Light blue Setting value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 P...

  • Page 738

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Horizontal plane rotation angle Set a rotating angle at the vertical direction center in front of the screen. The rotation direction is as follows. + - Rotation center Screen center rotation angle Set a rotating angle at the vertical direction ce...

  • Page 739

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION Fig. 13.2.1.2 (a) PATH GRAPHIC (EXECUTION) screen (8.4-inch LCD) Fig. 13.2.1.2 (b) PATH GRAPHIC (EXECUTION) screen (10.4-inch LCD) PATH GRAPHIC (EXECUTION) screen: Procedure Procedure 1 Press the function key (or when a small MDI unit is used) to d...

  • Page 740

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 13.2.1.2 (c) PATH GRAPHIC (EXECUTION) screen (8.4-inch LCD) Fig. 13.2.1.2 (d) PATH GRAPHIC (EXECUTION) screen (10.4-inch LCD) 3 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. The soft keys for tool path drawing are displayed. Fig. 13.2.1.2 (e) PATH GRAPHIC (EX...

  • Page 741

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION Fig. 13.2.1.2 (g) PATH GRAPHIC (EXECUTION) screen (enlarging/reducing/moving the graphic range) (8.4-inch LCD) Fig. 13.2.1.2 (h) PATH GRAPHIC (EXECUTION) screen (enlarging/reducing/moving the graphic range) (10.4-inch LCD) 5 Press the [COORDINATE...

  • Page 742

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 13.2.1.2 (n) Program list screen ([DRAW SELECT] soft key) (10.4-inch LCD) 2 Use the MDI keys to type the number of a program for drawing. 3 Press the [DRAW SELECT] soft key. The number of the program selected in the above steps is prefixed with &...

  • Page 743

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - Starting / Stopping drawing To draw the tool path of a program selected for drawing, press one of the following soft keys displayed by step 3 mentioned above: • [AUTO] soft key This soft key performs automatic scaling. Before drawing is started, th...

  • Page 744

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 13.2.1.2 (s) State indication during drawing STOP: Indicates that drawing is temporarily stopped. Fig. 13.2.1.2 (t) State indication during temporary stop ALM: Indicates that occurring of alarm in the Background operation. Fig. 13.2.1.2 (u)...

  • Page 745

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 719 - key automatically scales the set graphic range so that the range falls within the drawing area. When the graphic range (maximum and minimum values) is not set (0 is set), this operation is disabled. NOTE 1 Set the unit of scale for one enlargeme...

  • Page 746

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 720 - NOTE The graphic coordinate system selected here is set in the graphic parameter for the graphic coordinate system. - Rotating the graphic coordinate system The following soft keys displayed by step 6 are used. • [↑] soft key This soft ke...

  • Page 747

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION Fig. 13.2.1.3 (a) PATH GRAPHIC (POSITION) screen (8.4-inch LCD) Fig. 13.2.1.3 (b) PATH GRAPHIC (POSITION) screen (10.4-inch LCD) PATH GRAPHIC (POSITION) screen: Procedure Procedure 1 Press the function key (or when a small MDI unit is used) to dis...

  • Page 748

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 13.2.1.3 (c) PATH GRAPHIC (POSITION) screen (8.4-inch LCD) Fig. 13.2.1.3 (d) PATH GRAPHIC (POSITION) screen (10.4-inch LCD) For the method of checking the current tool position, see the explanation. Pressing a soft key other than the [POS] sof...

  • Page 749

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION The following items displayed on the screen are provided for the program under automatic operation: • Current coordinates • Feedrate and M/S/T/D code specification information NOTE 1 A tool path drawn by setting the tool offset parameter to 1 (to di...

  • Page 750

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Fig. 13.2.2.1 (a) ANIME GRAPHIC (SETTING-1) screen (8.4-inch LCD) Fig. 13.2.2.1 (b) ANIME GRAPHIC (SETTING-1) screen (10.4-inch LCD) - 724 -

  • Page 751

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION Fig. 13.2.2.1 (c) ANIME GRAPHIC (SETTING-2) screen (8.4-inch LCD) Fig. 13.2.2.1 (d) ANIME GRAPHIC (SETTING-2) screen (10.4-inch LCD) 2 Two screens are used for the ANIME GRAPHIC (SETTING) screen. Use the MDI page keys to switch between the screens fo...

  • Page 752

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 • Graphic coordinate system • Start/end sequence numbers • Rotation angles (vertical plane, horizontal plane, screen center) - Blank figure (BLANK(FORM)) With a drawing program, set the figure, position, and dimensions of a blank to be machined. ...

  • Page 753

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - Tool figure (radius) (TOOL FIGURE (RADIUS)) Set the radius of a tool figure to be drawn. The tool length is the same as dimension K of a blank figure in the Z-axis direction. XYZProgrammed point Tool length = Blank dimension KTool radius R - Graph...

  • Page 754

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 (5) Feedrate and M/S/T/D code instruction information (6) Graphic coordinate system Fig. 13.2.2.2 (a) ANIMATION GRAPHIC (EXECUTION) screen (8.4-inch LCD) Fig. 13.2.2.2 (b) ANIMATION GRAPHIC (EXECUTION) screen (10.4-inch LCD) ANIMATION GRAPHIC (EXECU...

  • Page 755

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION Fig. 13.2.2.2 (c) ANIMATION GRAPHIC (EXECUTION) screen (8.4-inch LCD) Fig. 13.2.2.2 (d) ANIMATION GRAPHIC (EXECUTION) screen (10.4-inch LCD) 3 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. The soft keys for tool path drawing are displayed. Fig. 13.2.2.2 (e) ANIMATI...

  • Page 756

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 4 Press the continuous menu key to display the soft keys for enlarging/reducing/moving the graphic range. Fig. 13.2.2.2 (g) ANIMATION GRAPHIC (EXECUTION) screen (enlarging/reducing/moving the graphic range) (8.4-inch LCD) Fig. 13.2.2.2 (h) ANIMATI...

  • Page 757

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 731 - NOTE 1 Blank initialization can also be performed by any of the following operations: - Start of drawing - Changing of the graphic coordinate system and graphic range by performing enlargement/reduction/movement/rotation operations - Change of sc...

  • Page 758

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 732 - • [ZY] soft key This soft key selects the graphic coordinate system of ZY (with a setting of 2). • [XZ] soft key This soft key selects the graphic coordinate system of XZ (with a setting of 3). • [XYZ] soft key This soft key selects the gra...

  • Page 759

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION 13.2.2.3 ANIMATION GRAPHIC (3-PLANE) screen For a three-dimensional machining profile drawn on the ANIMATION GRAPHIC (EXECUTION) screen, a three-plane diagram including one plan view and two side views can be drawn. You can select one of four pairs of si...

  • Page 760

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 ANIMATION GRAPHIC (3-PLANE) screen: Procedure Procedure 1 Press the function key (or when a small MDI unit is used) to display the ANIME GRAPHIC (SETTING-1) screen. If drawing is executed on the ANIMATION GRAPHIC (EXECUTION) screen before this operatio...

  • Page 761

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION 4 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. The soft keys for three-plane diagram drawing are displayed. Fig. 13.2.2.3 (e) ANIMATION GRAPHIC (3-PLANE) screen (three-plane diagram operation) (8.4-inch LCD) Fig. 13.2.2.3 (f) ANIMATION GRAPHIC (3-PLANE) screen (thr...

  • Page 762

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 Press [ ]. Press [ ]. Press [ ]. Press [ ]. Three-dimensional profile Top side viewLeft side view Right sideview Bottom side view Plan viewThe side view positions on the right figure above are changed as shown below. Display of the right and top ...

  • Page 763

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION Example 1 Example 2 Fig. 13.2.2.3 (h) Display example of cross section position You can change the cross section position continuously by holding down any of the MDI cursor keys. The amount of change of the cross section position can be modified in th...

  • Page 764

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 738 - NOTE 2 This command is a one-shot G code. 3 This command must be specified in a single block. Explanation - Blank figure (P_) Specify the type of a blank figure with either of the following settings for shapes. Setting Figure 0 Column or cylin...

  • Page 765

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - Operation to be performed when this command is issued When this command is executed in the animation drawing operation, the specified values are set in the drawing parameters for the blank figure, reference position, and dimensions that correspond to ...

  • Page 766

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 740 - - Operation to be performed when this command is issued When this command is executed in the animation drawing operation, the specified value is set in the graphic parameter for the tool figure (radius) that corresponds to the specified argument...

  • Page 767

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 741 - NOTE 3 When drawing is executed, data is treated as described below. (1) Parameters The same parameters as for automatic operation are used. However, parameters cannot be rewritten with a command such as the G10 command. If an attempt is made to...

  • Page 768

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 742 - 2 Functions that perform partly different operations 1) When G28 (automatic reference position return) is specified, up to the intermediate point is drawn. 2) When G29 (automatic return from the reference position) is specified, drawing is perfor...

  • Page 769

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION - 743 - 17) G96/G97 (Constant surface speed control/cancel) 18) M98 (Subprogram call) 19) G73/G74/G76/G81/G82/G83/G84/G85/G86/G87/G88/G89/G80 (Canned cycle for drilling) NOTE 1 It is possible to draw with the G68 (Coordinate system rotation) instruction...

  • Page 770

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 3) Please do not start / shut down the CNC screen display function when you display the drawing screen. Please start / shut down the CNC screen display function after it switches to other screens. - Use of the Screen hard copy function Drawing is tempo...

  • Page 771

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION NOTE A travel path cannot be drawn if axis movement is disabled due to the start lock or interlock state. Release the lock state before starting drawing. - Starting drawing • [EXEC] soft key Drawing is performed continuously until the M02 or M30 bl...

  • Page 772

    13.GRAPHIC FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 746 - 7 When changing the scale, key in a value from 0.01 to 100 (magnification) then press the [INPUT] soft key. An input value is displayed at "SCALE" in the lower-right corner of the screen. When you press the [+INPUT] soft key, the curre...

  • Page 773

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 14.VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION 14 VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION Chapter 14, "VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION", consists of the following sections: 14.1 VIRTUAL MDI KEY .................................................................................................................

  • Page 774

    14.VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - Simultaneous pressing of two keys The operation to be performed for pressing two key simultaneously, such as the "CANCEL" and "RESET" keys to erase alarm SW0100, is as follows: (1) Press the "SPCL" key. The "...

  • Page 775

    B-64304EN/02 OPERATION 14.VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION Function keys on page 1 Function keys on page 2 Function keys on page 3 - Display of virtual keys Pressing "KEY ON" located at the lower right corner of the screen displays virtual MDI keys. The character string on the key top c...

  • Page 776

    14.VIRTUAL MDI KEY FUNCTION OPERATION B-64304EN/02 - 750 - - Simultaneous pressing of two keys The operation to be performed for pressing two key simultaneously, such as the "CAN" and "RESET" keys to erase alarm SW0100, is as follows: (1) Press the "SPCL" key. The &...

  • Page 777

    IV. MAINTENANCE

  • Page 778

  • Page 779

    B-64304EN/02 MAINTENANCE 1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE This chapter describes routine maintenance work that the operator can perform when using the CNC. WARNING Only those persons who have been educated for maintenance and safety may perform maintenance work not described in this...

  • Page 780

    1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B-64304EN/02 Problem!Dangerous?Danger to you and othersNot dangerousCheck and identify problem.- Warning-Alarm- Abnormal operation- Wrong operation, etc.DangerousTake action to avoid danger.- Stop machine immediately.- Refuge to safe place immediately.Check statu...

  • Page 781

    B-64304EN/02 MAINTENANCE 1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE - Data backup operation The data items listed below should be backed up. For the method of data output operation, see the chapter of "DATA INPUT/OUTPUT" in this manual. <1> Machining programs → See III-8.2.1. <2> System par...

  • Page 782

    1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B-64304EN/02 - 756 - NOTE The method of recovery described in this section is intended just to restore the state of the backed up data, and does not guarantee recovery of the state that was present when the data was lost. 1.3 METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY This c...

  • Page 783

    B-64304EN/02 MAINTENANCE 1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE Extract the unit while holding this portion. (3) Mount the new battery unit. (Push the battery unit in until the claw is latched into the case.) Ensure that the latch is engaged securely. Push the unit in until the claw is latched into the case. ...

  • Page 784

    1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B-64304EN/02 CAUTION Steps (1) to (3) should be completed within 30 minutes. Do not leave the control unit without a battery for any longer than the specified period. Otherwise, the contents of memory may be lost. If steps (1) to (3) may not be completed with...

  • Page 785

    B-64304EN/02 MAINTENANCE 1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE CAUTION Complete steps 1 to 3 within 30 minutes. If the battery is left removed for a long time, the SRAM would lose the contents. If there is a danger that the replacement cannot be completed within 30 minutes, save the whole contents of the SRA...

  • Page 786

    1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B-64304EN/02 - 760 - 1.3.2 Battery for Absolute Pulsecoders • When the voltage of the batteries for absolute Pulsecoders becomes low, alarm 307 or 306 occurs, with the following indication in the CNC state display at the bottom of the CNC screen. Alarm 307 (al...

  • Page 787

    B-64304EN/02 MAINTENANCE 1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE WARNING - The absolute Pulsecoder of each of the αi/αi S series servo motors and the βi S series servo motors (βi S0.4 to βi S22) has a built-in backup capacitor. Therefore, even when the power to the servo amplifier is off and the batteries ar...

  • Page 788

    1.ROUTINE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE B-64304EN/02 - 762 - CAUTION - Purchase the battery from FANUC because it is not commercially available. It is therefore recommended that you have a backup battery. - When the built-in battery is used, do not connect BATL (B3) of connector CXA2A/CXA2B. Also, do ...

  • Page 789

    APPENDIX

  • Page 790

  • Page 791

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS A PARAMETERS This manual describes all parameters indicated in this manual. For those parameters that are not indicated in this manual and other parameters, refer to the parameter manual. NOTE A parameter that is valid with only one of the path control types f...

  • Page 792

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 766 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0001 FCV [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit path #1 FCV Program format 0: Series 0 standard format (This format is compliant with the Series 0i-C.) 1: Series 10/11 format NOTE 1 Programs created in the Ser...

  • Page 793

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 767 - • Data server interface • Embedded Ethernet interface By setting bit 0 (IO4) of parameter No. 0110, data input/output can be controlled separately. When IO4 is not set, data input/output is performed using the channel set in parameter No. 0020. When ...

  • Page 794

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 768 - For the 0i-D/0i Mate-D, be sure to set this parameter to 1. NOTE If this parameter is set to 0, a setting of 1 is assumed. 0981 Absolute path number to which each axis belongs NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before ope...

  • Page 795

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 769 - [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 1 Set the path control type of each path. The following two path control types are available: T series (lathe system) : 0 M series (machining system) : 1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1...

  • Page 796

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 770 - #7 IDG When the reference position is set without dogs, automatic setting of the IDGx parameter (bit 0 of parameter No.1012) to prevent the reference position from being set again is: 0: Not performed. 1: Performed. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1004 IPR...

  • Page 797

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 771 - #4 EDPx In cutting feed, an external deceleration signal in the + direction for each axis is: 0: Invalid 1: Valid NOTE Be sure to set "1" to this parameter if bit 5 (EDR) of parameter No.1405 is set to 0 when positioning linear interpolatio...

  • Page 798

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 772 - ROSx ROTx Meaning Except for the above. Setting is invalid (unused) #3 DIAx The move command for each axis is based on: 0: Radius specification 1: Diameter specification NOTE For the FS0i-C, one of the following changes is required besides setting b...

  • Page 799

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 773 - #2 RRLx Relative coordinates are 0: Not rounded by the amount of the shift per one rotation 1: Rounded by the amount of the shift per one rotation NOTE 1 RRLx is valid only when ROAx is 1. 2 Assign the amount of the shift per one rotation in parameter...

  • Page 800

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 774 - NOTE 1 When G code system A is used in the T series, U, V, or W cannot be used as an axis name. 2 The same axis name cannot be set for multiple axes. 3 When the second auxiliary function is provided (when bit 2 (BCD) of parameter No. 8132 is 1), if the a...

  • Page 801

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 775 - • With an axis for which Cs contour control/spindle positioning is to be performed, set -(spindle number) as the servo axis number. Example) When exercising Cs contour control on the fourth controlled axis by using the first spindle, set -1. • For ta...

  • Page 802

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 776 - NOTE ZCL is valid when the workpiece coordinate system is used (when bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136 is 0). To use the local coordinate system (G52), set bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136 to 0. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1202 G92 [Input typ...

  • Page 803

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 777 - [Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A)) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999) Set the coordinate system of the reference position on each axis to be used for setting a c...

  • Page 804

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 778 - #2 NPC As part of the stroke limit check performed before movement, the movement specified in G31 (skip) and G37 (automatic tool length measurement (M series) or automatic tool compensation (T series)) blocks is: 0: Checked 1: Not checked #6 OTS Wh...

  • Page 805

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 779 - 1324 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 3 in the positive direction on each axis 1325 Coordinate value of stored stroke check 3 in the negative direction on each axis [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm, inch, d...

  • Page 806

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 780 - #0 RPD Manual rapid traverse during the period from power-on time to the completion of the reference position return. 0: Disabled (Jog feed is performed.) 1: Enabled #1 LRP Positioning (G00) 0: Positioning is performed with non-linear type positioni...

  • Page 807

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 781 - #2 FM3 The increment system of an F command without a decimal point in feed per minute is: 0: 1 mm/min (0.01 inch/min for inch input) 1: 0.001 mm/min (0.00001 inch/min for inch input) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1405 EDR FR3 [Input type] Parame...

  • Page 808

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 782 - NOTE When the operation is begun, alarm PS5009 is issued if the setting of this parameter is set to "0.0". Even if the operation which is not dry run is performed, this alarm is issued. 1420 Rapid traverse rate for each axis [Input type] P...

  • Page 809

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 783 - NOTE 1 If 0 is set, the rate set in parameter 1420 (rapid traverse rate for each axis) is assumed. 2 When manual rapid traverse is selected (bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 1401 is set to 1), manual feed is performed at the feedrate set in this parameter, ...

  • Page 810

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 784 - NOTE 1 To this feedrate setting (100%), a rapid traverse override (F0, 25, 50, or 100%) is applicable. 2 For automatic return after completion of reference position return and machine coordinate system establishment, the normal rapid traverse rate is use...

  • Page 811

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 785 - 1432 Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes in the acceleration/deceleration before interpolation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the incremen...

  • Page 812

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 niFF100max=Δ (where, i=1 or 2) In the above equation, set n. That is, the number of revolutions of the manual pulse generator, required to reach feedrate Fmaxi is obtained. Fmaxi refers to the upper limit of the feedrate for a one-digit F code feed command, and...

  • Page 813

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 787 - The data is then converted to a millimeter value and displayed. NOTE 1 This parameter is valid when bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter No. 1006 and bit 0 (RFDx) of parameter No. 1408 are 1. 2 Be careful to set bit 0 (RFDx) of parameter No. 1408 and parameter No....

  • Page 814

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 NOTE When using bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation, set this parameter to 0 and set bit 1 (CTBx) of parameter No. 1610 to select bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation. - 788 - Parameter CTBx CTLx Acceleration/de...

  • Page 815

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS For bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration Speed Rapid traverse rate (Parameter No. 1420) Time T1 T2T2 T2T2 T1 T1 : Setting of parameter No. 1620 T2 : Setting of parameter No. 1621 (However, T1 ≥ T2 must be satisfied.) Total acceleration (deceleration) time ...

  • Page 816

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 If 0 is set, the specification of 100000.0 is assumed. If 0 is set for all axes, however, acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is not performed. If a maximum allowable acceleration rate set for one axis is greater than a maximum allowable acceleration...

  • Page 817

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS 1710 Minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) for inner circular cutting feedrate change by automatic corner override [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 0 to 100 Set a minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) for an inn...

  • Page 818

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 792 - Set an inner corner override value in automatic corner overriding. 1713 Start distance (Le) for inner corner override [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the incremen...

  • Page 819

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 793 - [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (D) (When the machine system is metric system, 0.0 to +100000.0. When the machine system is inch system, machine, 0.0 ...

  • Page 820

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 In the acceleration/deceleration before interpolation mode as in advanced preview control, AI advanced preview control, or AI contour control, not the ordinary time constant (parameter No. 1622) but the value of this parameter is used. Be sure to specify the sam...

  • Page 821

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 795 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1802 DC2x DC4x [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis #1 DC4x When the reference position is established on the linear scale with reference marks: 0: An absolute position is established by detecting three...

  • Page 822

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 796 - #4 APZx Machine position and position on absolute position detector when the absolute position detector is used 0: Not corresponding 1: Corresponding When an absolute position detector is used, after primary adjustment is performed or after the absolut...

  • Page 823

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 797 - #1 RF2x If G28 is specified for an axis for which a reference position is already established (ZRF = 1) when a linear scale with an absolute address zero point or a linear scale with absolute address reference marks is used: 0: A movement is made to th...

  • Page 824

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 Least command increment = detection unit × command multiplier Relationship between the increment system and the least command increment (1) T series Least command increment Least input increment 0.001 mm (diameter specification) 0.0005 mm Millimeter input 0.0...

  • Page 825

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 799 - [Detection unit]: Minimum unit for machine position detection The unit of feedback pulses varies, depending on the type of detector. [Feedback pulse unit]=[Amount of travel per rotation of the pulse coder]/[Number of pulses per rotation of the pulse cod...

  • Page 826

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 800 - When a linear scale with absolute address reference marks is used, set the interval of mark 1. 1828 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in movement [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data...

  • Page 827

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS Distance 1 from the scale zero point to reference position (linear scale with absolute address reference marks) or distance 1 from the base point to reference position (linear scale with an absolute address zero point) 1883 NOTE When this parameter is set, th...

  • Page 828

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 [Example of parameter settings] When an encoder as shown below is used with an IS-B, millimeter machine: 20.00019.980 9.940 10.060 9.960 10.040 9.980 10.020 5.00020.000mm 20.020mm -[9960/(20020-20000)*20000+5000] = -9965000 Mark 1 Mark 2 Mark 1 Mark 2Mark 1Ma...

  • Page 829

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 803 - <1> Set bit 1 (OPT) of parameter No. 1815 , bit 2 (DCL) of parameter No. 1815, and bit 3 (SDC) of parameter No. 1818 to enable this function. Set 0 in parameter No. 1240. Set 0 in parameter No. 1883 and No. 1884. <2> At an appropriate posit...

  • Page 830

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 804 - #1 ASE When automatic setting mode is selected for FSSB setting (when the FMD parameter (bit 0 of parameter No.1902) is set to 0), automatic setting is: 0: Not completed. 1: Completed. This bit is automatically set to 1 upon the completion of automatic...

  • Page 831

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 805 - Example) Controlled axis Connector number for the first separate detector interface unit Connector number for the second separate detector interface unit No.1936 No.1937 PM2x, PM1x (No.1905#7, #6) X 1 Not used 0 0 0, 1 Y Not used 2 0 1 1, 0 Z Not used 1 ...

  • Page 832

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 806 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 MVG 3003 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #7 MVGDuring drawing with the dynamic graphic display function, the axis movement signal is: 0: Output. 1: Not output. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 ...

  • Page 833

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 807 - NOTE This parameter is valid when bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is set to 1. The X addresses that can be actually used are shown below, but they depend on the configuration of I/O Link point count expansion options. X0 to X127, X200 to X327 3013 ...

  • Page 834

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 808 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 X006 ESKIP -MIT2 +MIT2 -MIT1 +MIT1 XAE2 XAE1 (T series) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 ESKIP XAE3 XAE2 XAE1 (M series) Example 2. When No.3012 is set to 5 and No.3019 is set to 5 When XSG (bit 2 of parameter No. 3008) is 1,...

  • Page 835

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 809 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DAC DRC PPD MCN 3104 DAC DAL DRC DRL PPD MCN [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 MCN Machine position 0: Regardless of whether input is made in mm or inches, the machine position is displayed in mm...

  • Page 836

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 810 - #7 DAC When an absolute position are displayed: 0: Values not excluding the amount of travel based on cutter compensation and tool nose radius compensation are displayed. 1: Values excluding the amount of travel based on cutter compensation and tool no...

  • Page 837

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 811 - #6 OPS The speedometer on the operating monitor screen indicates: 0: Spindle motor speed 1: Spindle speed #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3112 EAH OMH [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #2 OMH The external operator message history scr...

  • Page 838

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 812 - 3122 Time interval used to record time data in operation history [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Unit of data] min [Valid data range] 0 to 1440 When history data is recorded within a set time period, the time for each set time pe...

  • Page 839

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 813 - Setting value Axis name displayed on a screen such as the position display screen 0 X 1 X1 77 XM 83 XS When the subscription of an axis name is not set in a 2-path system, the subscription of an axis name is automatically set to the path number. To hid...

  • Page 840

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 814 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DOP 3193 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #2 DOP In 2-path control, on the POSITION screen (absolute, relative, all, manual handle interruption), PROGRAM CHECK screen, and ALARM screen, two pat...

  • Page 841

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 815 - #3 HMV A modification history of custom macro common variables is: 0: Not recorded. 1: Recorded. #6 HOM The operation history is: 0: Recorded. 1: Not recorded. #7 HAL When an alarm is issued, additional information (modal data, absolute coordinat...

  • Page 842

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 816 - #3 OSR Pressing the [O SEARCH] soft key without entering a program number with keys in a program number search: 0: Searches for the next program number (order of registration). 1: Disables the search. #4 NE9 Editing of subprograms with program numbe...

  • Page 843

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 817 - #6 MKP When M02, M30, or EOR(%) is executed during MDI operation, the created MDI program is: 0: Erased automatically. 1: Not erased automatically. NOTE If the bit 6 (MER) of parameter No. 3203 is 1, executing the last block provides a choice of whe...

  • Page 844

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 818 - NOTE 1 The state where password ≠ 0 and password ≠ keyword is referred to as the locked state. When an attempt is made to modify the password by MDI input operation in this state, the warning message "WRITE PROTECTED" is displayed to indica...

  • Page 845

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 819 - 9 : Danish 10 : Portuguese 11 : Polish 12 : Hungarian 13 : Swedish 14 : Czech 15 : Chinese(simplified characters) 16 : Russian 17 : Turkish 18 : Bulgarian If a number not indicated above is set, English is selected. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 GSC GSB A...

  • Page 846

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 820 - [Data type] Bit path #0 G01 G01 Mode entered when the power is turned on or when the control is cleared 0: G00 mode (positioning) 1: G01 mode (linear interpolation) #1 G18 Plane selected when power is turned on or when the control is cleared 0: G1...

  • Page 847

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 821 - #5 M02 When M02 is specified in memory operation 0: M02 is sent to the machine, and the head of the program is automatically searched for. So, when the end signal FIN is returned and a reset or reset and rewind operation is not performed, the program ...

  • Page 848

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 NOTE If this bit (CCR) is set to 0, the function for changing the compensation direction by specifying I, J, or K in a G01 block in the tool nose radius compensation mode cannot be used. If this bit (CCR) is set to 1 when address C is used as an axis name, the ...

  • Page 849

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 823 - 3411 M code preventing buffering 1 3412 M code preventing buffering 2 : 3420 M code preventing buffering 10 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 3 to 99999999 Set M codes that prevent buffering the following bloc...

  • Page 850

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 824 - NOTE 2 If the minimum value is greater than the maximum value, the setting is invalid. 3 If there is only one data item, the minimum value must be equal to the maximum value. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3450 BDX AUP [Input type] Parameter input ...

  • Page 851

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 825 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3451 GQS [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 GQS When threading is specified, the threading start angle shift function (Q) is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3452 EAP...

  • Page 852

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 826 - 3460 Second auxiliary function specification address [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 65to67, 85to87 Specify which of A, B, C, U, V, and W is to be used as the address for specifying the second auxiliary function....

  • Page 853

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 827 - Set the number of the pitch error compensation position at the extremely negative position for each axis. 3622 Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely positive position for each axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power mus...

  • Page 854

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 828 - 3625 Travel distance per revolution in pitch error compensation of rotation axis type NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm...

  • Page 855

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 829 - 3627 Pitch error compensation at reference position when a movement to the reference position is made from the direction opposite to the direction of reference position return NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operat...

  • Page 856

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 830 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3716 A/Ss [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit spindle NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. #0 A/Ss Spindle motor type is : 0: Analog spindle. 1: Se...

  • Page 857

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word spindle [Unit of data] min-1 [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 Set the maximum spindle speed corresponding to each gear. Spindle motor max. clamp speed (Parameter No.3736) Spindle speed command (S command) Max....

  • Page 858

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 832 - If bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703 is set to 1, set the P code to select each spindle under multi-spindle control. Specify the P code in a block containing the S command. Example) If the P code value for selecting the second spindle is set to 3, S1000...

  • Page 859

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 833 - NOTE The unit of data is determined by bit 0 (FLR) of parameter No. 4900. Spindle variation ratio (r) for not issuing a spindle speed fluctuation detection alarm 4912 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word spindle [Unit of data] 1%, 0.1%...

  • Page 860

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 834 - #1 IDMs The direction of spindle positioning (half-fixed angle positioning based on M codes) is: 0: Plus direction. 1: Minus direction. #2 ISZs When an M code for spindle orientation is specified in spindle positioning: 0: The spindle is switched to...

  • Page 861

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 835 - • When the number of M codes is set in parameter No. 4964, let α be the value set in parameter No. 4962, and let β be the value set in parameter No. 4964. Then, β M codes from Mα to M(α+β-1) are used as M codes for half-fixed angle positioning ba...

  • Page 862

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 836 - NOTE 1 Make sure that M codes from Mα to M (α+β-1) do not duplicate other M codes. 2 Do not set an M code that duplicates other M codes used for spindle positioning. 3 Do not set an M code used with other functions (such as M00-05, 30, 98, and 99, and...

  • Page 863

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS NOTE This parameter is valid when tool geometry/wear compensation is enabled (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No. 8136 is 0). #2 LWT Tool wear compensation is performed by: 0: Moving the tool. 1: Shifting the coordinate system. NOTE This parameter is valid when t...

  • Page 864

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 838 - NOTE When SUV,SUP = 0,1 (type B), an operation equivalent to that of FS0i-TC is performed. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 ORC 5004 ODI [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #1 ORC The setting of a tool offset value is corre...

  • Page 865

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 839 - NOTE A value longer than the setting of parameter No. 3032 (allowable number of digits of a T code) cannot be set. 5029 Number of tool compensation value memories common to paths NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before ...

  • Page 866

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 840 - NOTE This parameter is valid when tool geometry/wear compensation is enabled (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No. 8136 is 0). #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5042 OFC OFA [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path NOTE When at least one of these ...

  • Page 867

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 841 - #0 FXY The drilling axis in the drilling canned cycle, or cutting axis in the grinding canned cycle is: 0: In case of the Drilling canned cycle: Z-axis at all times. In case of the Grinding canned cycle: • For the T series Z-axis at all times. •...

  • Page 868

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 842 - Grinding axis number of Traverse direct constant-size Grinding cycle(G72) 5177 Grinding axis number of Direct Constant Dimension Plunge Grinding Cycle(G77) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controll...

  • Page 869

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 843 - NOTE The axis number except for the cutting axis can be specified. When the axis number which is same to cutting axis is specified, PS0456 alarm is issued at the time of execution. The Grinding Cycle is executed when this parameter value is 0, PS0456 ala...

  • Page 870

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 844 - NOTE The axis number except for the cutting axis or grinding axis can be specified. When the axis number which is same to cutting axis or grinding axis is specified, PS0456 alarm is issued at the time of execution. The Grinding Cycle is executed when thi...

  • Page 871

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 845 - [Valid data range] 0 to 9999 Spindle position coder gear ratio 1 : 1 0 to 7400 1 : 2 0 to 9999 1 : 4 0 to 9999 1 : 8 0 to 9999 Each of these parameters is used to set a maximum spindle speed for each gear in rigid tapping. Set the same value for both...

  • Page 872

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 846 - 5421 Scaling magnification for each axis [Input type] Setting input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] 0.001 or 0.00001 times (Selected using SCR, #7 of parameter No.5400) [Valid data range] -999999999 to –1, 1 to 999999999 This parameter se...

  • Page 873

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 847 - #2 PLS The polar coordinate interpolation shift function is: 0: Not used. 1: Used. This enables machining using the workpiece coordinate system with a desired point which is not the center of the rotation axis set as the origin of the coordinate system...

  • Page 874

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 This parameter sets the feedrate of the movement along the normal direction controlled axis that is inserted at the start point of a block during normal direction control. 5483 Limit value of movement that is executed at the normal direction angle of a prece...

  • Page 875

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 849 - (1) Tool offset memory A System variable number V10 = 0 V10 = 1 Wear offset value #10001 to #10400 (#2001 to #2200) #10001 to #10400 (#2001 to #2200) (2) Tool offset memory C System variable number V10 = 0 V10 = 1 Wear offset value #11001 to #11400 (#2...

  • Page 876

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 850 - #5 TCS Custom macro (subprogram) 0: Not called using a T code 1: Called using a T code #6 CCV Common variables #100 to #199 cleared by power-off are: 0: Cleared to <null> by reset 1: Not cleared by reset #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6003 MSB ...

  • Page 877

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 851 - #5 D10 When tool compensation memory C is used, for reading or writing tool offset values (for up to offset number 200) for D code (tool radius), the same system variables, #2401 through #2800, as Series 10/11 are: 0: Not used. 1: Used. When bit 3 (V10...

  • Page 878

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 852 - NOTE For details, refer to the custom macro chapter in the Operator's Manual (B-64304EN). #1 MCA A macro alarm specification based on system variable #3000 is selected as follows: 0: An alarm number obtained by adding 3000 to a value assigned to var...

  • Page 879

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 853 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6010 *7 *6 *5 *4 *3 *2 *1 *0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6011 =7 =6 =5 =4 =3 =2 =1 =0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6012 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6013 [7 [6 [5 [4 [3 [2 [1 [0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6014...

  • Page 880

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 854 - NOTE 2 Accuracy of the output data of the comment is up to 15 digits. The range of output data are nine digits above decimal point and eight digits below decimal point. "± OVER FLOW" is output instead of a value when the total digits number is...

  • Page 881

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 855 - Number of custom macro variables common to tool path (for #100 to #199) 6036 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 100 When the memory common to paths is used, this parameter sets the number of custom macro common va...

  • Page 882

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 856 - 6040 Number of G codes used to call custom macros [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to 255 Set this parameter to define multiple custom macro calls using G codes at a time. With G codes as many as the value set i...

  • Page 883

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 857 - Set this parameter to define multiple subprogram calls using M codes at a time. With M codes as many as the value set in parameter No. 6046 starting with the M code set in parameter No. 6044, the subprograms of program numbers as many as the value set in...

  • Page 884

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 858 - M90000001 → O4001 M90000002 → O4002 : M90000099 → O4099 NOTE 1 When the following conditions are satisfied, all calls using these parameters are disabled: 1) When a value not within the specifiable range is set in each parameter 2) (Value of...

  • Page 885

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 859 - 6075 M code used to call the subprogram of program number 9005 6076 M code used to call the subprogram of program number 9006 6077 M code used to call the subprogram of program number 9007 6078 M code used to call the subprogram of program number ...

  • Page 886

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 860 - NOTE 1 If the same M code is set in these parameters, the younger number is called preferentially. For example, if 200 is set in parameter No. 6081 and No. 6082, and programs O9021 and O9022 both exist, O9021 is called when M200 is specified. 2 If the sa...

  • Page 887

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 861 - #1 SK0 This parameter specifies whether the skip signal is made valid under the state of the skip signal SKIP and the multistage skip signals SKIP2 to SKIP8. 0: Skip signal is valid when these signals are 1. 1: Skip signal is valid when these signals ...

  • Page 888

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 Position during skip operationCurrent position of CNCMachine positionError amountPosition in consideration of delay Position without consideration of delayOrigin of the coordinate systemStop point #4 IGX When the high-speed skip function is used, SKIP, SKIP...

  • Page 889

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 863 - Parameter High-speed skip signals 1S1 HDI0 1S2 HDI1 1S3 HDI2 1S4 HDI3 NOTE Do not specify the same signal simultaneously for different paths. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6203 2S8 2S7 2S6 2S5 2S4 2S3 2S2 2S1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6204 3S8 3S7 3S6 3...

  • Page 890

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 864 - Commands skipped by SKIPP signal <G006.6> Parameter Command skipped When bit 0 (3S1) of parameter No. 6204 is set to 1 G31P3,G04Q3 When bit 0 (4S1) of parameter No. 6205 is set to 1 G31P4,G04Q4 When bit 6 (DS1) of parameter No. 6206 is set to 1 G04...

  • Page 891

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 865 - 6254 ε value on the X axis during automatic tool compensation (T series) ε value during automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE1 and GAE1 signals) 6255 ε value on the Z axis during automatic tool compensation (T series) ε val...

  • Page 892

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 866 - Each of these parameters sets a feedrate for each skip function G code. These parameters are valid when bit 2 (SFN) of parameter No. 6207 is set to 1. 6287 Positional deviation limit in torque limit skip [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-wo...

  • Page 893

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 867 - #5 RVN When the manual handle retrace function is used, M codes other than grouped M codes: 0: Do not disable backward movement. 1: Disable backward movement. When this parameter is set to 1, M codes other than grouped M codes disable backward movemen...

  • Page 894

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 868 - 6405 Override value (equivalence) for clamping the rapid traverse rate used with the manual handle retrace function [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 0 to 100 This parameter sets an override value...

  • Page 895

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 869 - 6431 M code of group F in manual handle retrace (1) to to 6434 M code of group F in manual handle retrace (4) 6435 M code of group G in manual handle retrace (1) to to 6438 M code of group G in manual handle retrace (4) 6439 M code of group H in...

  • Page 896

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 870 - 6487 M code of group T in manual handle retrace (1) to to 6490 M code of group T in manual handle retrace (4) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 0 to 9999 Set a group of M codes output during backward movement. ...

  • Page 897

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 871 - #0 ORG When the coordinate system is changed during tool path drawing by the dynamic graphic display function, drawing is performed: 0: With the same coordinate system. 1: With the current drawing point assumed to be the current position set in the new...

  • Page 898

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 Setting =0 or 10 Z X2 X1 Setting =1 or 11 ZX2X1Setting =2 or 12 Z X1X2Setting =3 or 13 Z X2 X1 Setting =4 or 14 ZX2X1Setting =5 or 15 Z X1 X2 Setting =6 or 16 Z X2 X1 Setting =7 or 17 ZX2X1Setting =8 or 18 ZX1X2 Setting =9 or 19 Z X1 X2 65...

  • Page 899

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS For M series: YX Setting = 0 (XY) ZYSetting = 1 (YZ) YZ Setting = 2 (ZY) ZX Setting = 3 (XZ) Setting = 5 (ZXY) ZXYSetting = 4 (XYZ) YXZ For T series: Setting =0 Setting =1Setting =2Setting =3 Setting =4 Setting =5Setting =6Setting =7 X ZZZZZ ...

  • Page 900

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 874 - 6515 Change in the cross-sectional position in a triplane drawing in dynamic graphic display [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Unit of data] Dot [Valid data range] 0 to 10 This parameter sets changes in the cross-sectional posit...

  • Page 901

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 875 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6700 PCM [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 PCM M code that counts the total number of machined parts and the number of machined parts 0: M02, or M30, or an M code specified by parameter No.6710 1...

  • Page 902

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 876 - 6713 Number of required parts [Input type] Setting input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 0 to 999999999 This parameter sets the number of required machined parts. Required parts finish signal PRTSF <F0062.7> is output to PMC when the...

  • Page 903

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 877 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6800 M6T IGI SNG GRS SIG LTM GS2 GS1 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 GS1 #1 GS2 For the maximum number of groups set in parameter No. 6813, up to four tools can be registered per group. The combina...

  • Page 904

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 878 - #6 IGI Tool back numbers are: 0: Not ignored. 1: Ignored. #7 M6T A T code specified in the same block as M06 is: 0: Assumed to be a back number. 1: Assumed to be a command specifying the next tool group. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 M6E EMD LVF TS...

  • Page 905

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6802 RMT TSK E17 TCO T99 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 T99 When M99 of the main program is executed, and there is a the life was expired tool group: 0: The tool change signal is not output. 1: The tool c...

  • Page 906

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 880 - NOTE When tool information of a tool being used (marked with "@") in the group being used or to be used next or tool information of the most recently used tool (marked with "@") in a group that is neither the group being used nor the ...

  • Page 907

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 881 - NOTE When this parameter is set to 1, tool life data can be edited even during automatic operation (the OP signal is "1"). If the target group for editing is the group being used or the group to be used next, however, only presetting of the li...

  • Page 908

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 882 - #5 TRS Tool change reset signal TLRST is valid when reset signal RST is not "1" and: 0: The reset state (automatic operation signal OP is "0") is observed. 1: The reset state (automatic operation signal OP is "0"), automat...

  • Page 909

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 883 - 6813 Maximum number of groups in tool life management NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Unit of data] Group [Valid data range] 0, 8, 16 ...

  • Page 910

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 884 - [Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A)) (When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999) Set the maximum value of the operating range of the first to sixteenth position switches. ...

  • Page 911

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 885 - [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0) This parameter sets the acceleration/deceleration referenc...

  • Page 912

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 #2 HNT When compared with the travel distance magnification selected by the manual handle feed travel distance selection signals (incremental feed signals) (MP1, MP2), the travel distance magnification for incremental feed/manual handle feed is: 0: Same. 1: 10...

  • Page 913

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS Magnification set by MP1,MP2<Gn019.4,.5> is m, value of parameter No.7117 is n. n < m: Clamping is set performed at value of parameter No.7117. n ≥ m: Amount A+B, showed in figure, which’s value is multiple of m and small than n. As a result, ...

  • Page 914

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 #4 OP5 Optional block skip select, single block select, machine lock select, and dry run select on software operator's panel 0: Not performed 1: Performed #5 OP6 Protect key on software operator's panel 0: Not performed 1: Performed #6 OP7 Feed hold on s...

  • Page 915

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 889 - Parameter No.7210 = 5 (Z axis, positive direction) Parameter No.7211 = 6 (Z axis, negative direction) Parameter No.7212 = 1 (X axis, positive direction) Parameter No.7213 = 2 (X axis, negative direction) Parameter No.7214 = 3 (Y axis, positive direction)...

  • Page 916

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 890 - Control axis number of tool rotation axis for polygon turning 7610 NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 1 to number of c...

  • Page 917

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 891 - NOTE 1 Spindle-spindle polygon turning is enabled only for serial spindles. 2 When any one of parameter No. 7640 and No. 7641 is set to 0, polygon turning is performed using the first spindle (master axis) and the second spindle (polygon synchronous axis...

  • Page 918

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 892 - NOTE 1 Spindle-spindle polygon turning is enabled only for serial spindles. 2 This parameter is invalid if either parameter No. 7642 or No.7643 is set to 0. In this case, the settings of parameter No. 7640 and No.7641 are valid. 3 When an axis other than...

  • Page 919

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS When HDR = 1 +C C : +, Z : +, P : + Compensation direction:+ (a) -Z +Z +CC : +, Z : +, P : - Compensation direction:-(b)+CC : +, Z : -, P : + Compensation direction:-(c)+C C : +, Z : -, P : - Compensation direction:+ (d) -Z +Z C : -, Z : +, P : + C : Compensatio...

  • Page 920

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 894 - NOTE In either case, a value from 1 to 1000 can be specified. #3 ART The retract function executed when an alarm is issued is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. When an alarm is issued, a retract operation is performed with a set feedrate and travel distance ...

  • Page 921

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 895 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7731 ECN EFX [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 EFX As the EGB command: 0: G80 and G81 are used. 1: G80.4 and G81.4 are used. NOTE When this parameter is set to 0, no drilling canned cyc...

  • Page 922

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 Set parameters Nos. 7772 and 7773 when using the G81 EGB synchronization command. [Example 1] When the EGB master axis is the spindle and the EGB slave axis is the C-axis Synchronization switch CNC Detection unitβ p/rev α p/rev C-axis Least command incremen...

  • Page 923

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 897 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8001 RDE OVE MLE [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #0 MLE Whether all axis machine lock signal MLK is valid for PMC-controlled axes 0: Valid 1: Invalid The axis-by-axis machine lock signal MLKx depend...

  • Page 924

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 898 - #4 PF1 #5 PF2 Set the feedrate unit of cutting feedrate (feed per minute) for an axis controlled by the PMC. Bit 5 (PF2) of parameter No. 8002 Bit 4 (PF1) of parameter No. 8002 Feedrate unit 0 0 1 / 10 1 1 / 101 0 1 / 1001 1 1 / 1000 #6 FR1 #7 FR...

  • Page 925

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 899 - #6 EZR In PMC axis control, bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter No. 1005 is: 0: Invalid. With a PMC controlled axis, the alarm (PS0224) is not issued. 1: Valid. A reference position return state check is made on a PMC controlled axis as with an NC axis according...

  • Page 926

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 900 - NOTE When 0 is set in this parameter, the value set in parameter No. 1622 is used. The value set in parameter No. 1622 is used also for linear acceleration/deceleration after cutting interpolation. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 MWT 8103 ...

  • Page 927

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 901 - NOTE When spindle control with servo motor is enabled, set the number of axes including this axis for the axes with a spindle controlled axis with servo motor. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 EDC HPG 8131 AOV EDC F1D HPG NOTE When at least one ...

  • Page 928

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 902 - #2 BCD Second auxiliary function is: 0: Not Used. 1: Used. #3 IXC Index table indexing is: 0: Not Used. 1: Used. NOTE When enabling the index table indexing function, set bit 0 (ITI) of parameter No. 5501 to 0 in addition to this parameter. The i...

  • Page 929

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 903 - NOTE 3 Be sure to set 0 in bit 1 (AXC) of parameter No.8133 and 1 in bit 2 (SCS) of parameter No.8133 to use the serial spindle Cs contour control function. #2 SCS Cs contour control is: 0: Not Used. 1: Used. NOTE 1 Be sure to set 0 in bit 1 (AXC) of...

  • Page 930

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 904 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 NCT NBG NGR CCR BAR IAP 8134 NCT NBG NGR BAR IAP NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #0 IAP C...

  • Page 931

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 905 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8135 NPD NCV NMC NOR NRG NSQ NHI NPE NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #0 NPE Stored pitch error ...

  • Page 932

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 906 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 NCR NGW NDO NOW NOP NWC NWZ 8136 NTL NGW NDO NOW NOP NWN NWC NWZ NOTE When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit...

  • Page 933

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 907 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 NVC 8137 NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #0 NVC Balance cutting is: 0: Used. 1: Not Used. NOTE ...

  • Page 934

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 908 - NOTE If a move command is specified for an axis with NUMx set to 1 when neither synchronous control nor composite control is applied, alarm PS0353 is issued. Master axis with which an axis is synchronized under synchronous control 8180 [Input type...

  • Page 935

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 909 - In this case, a movement along the child is made by its travel distance plus the travel distance of the parent, and a movement along the grandchild is made by its travel distance plus the travel distance of the child plus the travel distance of the paren...

  • Page 936

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 910 - #7 ADG The contents of diagnostic data Nos. 306 and 307 are: 0: Not swapped. The slanted axis and Cartesian axis are displayed in this order. 1: Swapped. The Cartesian axis and slanted axis are displayed in this order. 8210 Slant angle of a slanted a...

  • Page 937

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 911 - NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. #7 SMA When an absolute position detector is attached, and bit 4 (APZ) of parameter No. 1815 for an axis in synchronous operation is set to OFF, APZ of the p...

  • Page 938

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 912 - #0 SSAx When the one-direction synchronization establishment function under axis synchronous control is used: 0: The axis with a larger machine coordinate is used as the reference. 1: The axis with a smaller machine coordinate is used as the reference....

  • Page 939

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 913 - #0 SSO The uni-directional synchronization function in axis synchronous control is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. #1 SSE After emergency stop, the uni-directional synchronization function in axis synchronous control is: 0: Enabled. 1: Disabled. 8311 A...

  • Page 940

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 914 - NOTE In synchronous operation with mirror image applied, synchronization establishment, synchronization error checking, and modification mode cannot be used. 8314 Maximum allowable error in synchronization error check based on machine coordinates [I...

  • Page 941

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 915 - 8326 Difference between master axis and slave axis reference counters [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 999999999 The difference between the master axis reference counter and s...

  • Page 942

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 916 - When this parameter is 0, clamping is not performed. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8900 PWE [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit #0 PWE The setting, from an external device and MDI panel, of those parameters that cannot be set by setting...

  • Page 943

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 917 - NOTE 1 This parameter is valid when SPSP<Gn536.7> is set to 1. 2 If the setting is illegal, an alarm (PS5305) is issued when a spindle command is issued from any one of the paths. 3 This setting does not apply to spindle commands using the spindle ...

  • Page 944

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 918 - Display sequence of coordinatesSetting 1 2 3 4 0 Relative coordinates Absolute coordinates Machine coordinates Remaining travel distance1 Relative coordinates Machine coordinates Absolute coordinates Remaining travel distance2 Relative coordinates Remain...

  • Page 945

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 919 - #7 GST When drawing cannot be performed for a command with the dynamic graphic display function: 0: The command is ignored, and drawing continues without stopping drawing. 1: Drawing stops. 11330 Magnification of drawing in dynamic graphic display ...

  • Page 946

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 920 - 11334 Rotation angle of the drawing coordinate system in dynamic graphic display (vertical direction) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Unit of data] degree [Valid data range] -360 to 360 This parameter sets the rotation angle (...

  • Page 947

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 921 - [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter sets the sequence number at which drawing is ended by the dynamic graphic display function. 11341 Drawing color of a blank figure in dynamic graphic display [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] B...

  • Page 948

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 922 - 11345 Blank dimension I in dynamic graphic display 11346 Blank dimension J in dynamic graphic display 11347 Blank dimension K in dynamic graphic display [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit...

  • Page 949

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 923 - NOTE When G92, G52, or G92.1 is specified at the beginning of a program to be drawn, the position specified in this G code is assumed to be the drawing start position. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 11350 PNE [Input type] Parameter input [Data ty...

  • Page 950

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 924 - [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table (B)) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.000 to +999999.999) This p...

  • Page 951

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 925 - Set the number of a G code modal group to be recorded in the alarm history and operation history when an alarm is issued. * If a value beyond the valid data range is set, the status of group 04 is recorded. 13221 M code for tool life count restart [I...

  • Page 952

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 926 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 13601 MPR NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit #0 MPR The machining parameter adjustment screen is: 0: Displaye...

  • Page 953

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 927 - [Unit of data] mm/sec/sec, inch/sec/sec, degree/sec/sec (machine unit) [Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (D) (When the machine system is metric system,...

  • Page 954

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 928 - Each of these parameters sets a maximum cutting speed in advanced preview control/AI advanced preview control/AI contour control. Set a value (precision level 1) with emphasis placed on speed, and a value (precision level 10) with emphasis on precision. ...

  • Page 955

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 929 - 13662 Acceleration rate change time (bell-shaped) when AI contour control is used (precision level 1), range extended 13663 Acceleration rate change time (bell-shaped) when AI contour control is used (precision level 10), range extended [Input t...

  • Page 956

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 930 - [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter sets the maximum allowable travel distance at the FL feedrate when the reference position is established for a linear scale with an absolute address r...

  • Page 957

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS Example of axis configuration and parameter settings - Example 1 10213243546647-568 to 18-96Slave numberATRNo.14340 to 14357X A Y Z B (M1) (M2) (None) Axis 1 X 12 Y 33 Z 44 A 25 B 5Controlled axis numberProgram axis name No.1020 Servo axis No.1023CNC Two-axis a...

  • Page 958

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - Example 2 Example of axis configuration and parameter settings when the electronic gear box (EGB) function is used (EGB slave axis: A-axis, EGB dummy axis: B-axis) 1021324456647-568 to 183-96ATRNo.14340to 14357X Y A Z (M1) (M2) B(Dummy) (None) 1 X 12 Y 23 Z...

  • Page 959

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 933 - NOTE When the FSSB is set to the automatic setting mode (when the parameter FMD (No.1902#0) is set to 0), parameter Nos. 14376 to 14391 are automatically set as data is input on the FSSB setting screen. When the manual setting 2 mode is set (when the pa...

  • Page 960

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 934 - [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 255 This parameter sets the unit (in degrees) of a rotation angle by which the drawing coordinate system is rotated with the dynamic graphic display function. If 0 is set, 10 is assumed. 18060 Backward movement...

  • Page 961

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 935 - #5 FRP linear-shaped rapid traverse in the advanced preview control/AI advance preview control/AI contour control mode is: 0: Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation. 1: Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. Set a maximum allowable acce...

  • Page 962

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 936 - A.2 DATA TYPE Parameters are classified by data type as follows: Data type Valid data range Remarks Bit Bit machine group Bit path Bit axis Bit spindle 0 or 1 Byte Byte machine group Byte path Byte axis Byte spindle -128 to 127 0 to 255 Some parameters...

  • Page 963

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX A.PARAMETERS - 937 - A.3 STANDARD PARAMETER SETTING TABLES This section defines the standard minimum data units and valid data ranges of the CNC parameters of the real type, real machine group type, real path type, real axis type, and real spindle type. The data type and uni...

  • Page 964

    A.PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 938 - (D)Acceleration and angular acceleration parameters Unit of data Increment system Minimum data unitValid data range IS-A 0.01 0.00 to +999999.99 IS-B 0.001 0.000 to +999999.999 mm/sec2 deg./sec2 IS-C 0.0001 0.0000 to +99999...

  • Page 965

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX B.PROGRAM CODE LIST B PROGRAM CODE LIST ISO code EIA code Custom macro Character name Character Code (hexadecimal)CharacterCode (hexadecimal)without custom macro with custom macro Number 0 0 30 0 20 Number 1 1 B1 1 01 Number 2 2 B2 2 02 Number 3 3 33 3 13 Number 4 4 ...

  • Page 966

    B.PROGRAM CODE LIST APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 940 - ISO code EIA code Custom macro Character name Character Code (hexadecimal)CharacterCode (hexadecimal)without custom macro with custom macro Colon (address O) : 3A Optional block skip / AF / 31 Period (decimal point) . 2E . 6B Sharp # A3 Par...

  • Page 967

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX C.LIST OF FUNCTIONS ANDPROGRAM FORMATC LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT With some functions, the format used for specification on the M series differs from the format used for specification on the T series. Some functions are supported only for either M series or T ser...

  • Page 968

    APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 C. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT - 942 - Functions Illustration Program format Helical interpolation (G02, G03) (x, y)(xyz)zStartpoint In case of G03 on X-Y plane G02G03X_ Y_ R_ I_ J_ α_ F_ ;G17G02G03X_ Z_ R_ I_ K_ α_ F_ ;G18G02G03Y_ Z_ R_ J_ K_ α_ F_ ;G19α: Ar...

  • Page 969

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX C.LIST OF FUNCTIONS ANDPROGRAM FORMAT- 943 - Functions Illustration Program format Programmable data input (G10) M Tool compensation memory A G10 L01 P_ R_ ; Tool compensation memory C G10 L10 P_ R_ ; (Geometry offset amount/H) G10 L11 P_ R_ ; (Wear offset amount/H...

  • Page 970

    APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 C. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT - 944 - Functions Illustration Program format M Movement from reference position (G29) Reference positionIPIntermediate point G29 IP_ ; Skip function (G31) Start pointSkip signalIP G31 IP_ F_ ; M Threading (G33) M G33 IP_ F_ ...

  • Page 971

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX C.LIST OF FUNCTIONS ANDPROGRAM FORMAT- 945 - Functions Illustration Program format M Normal direction control (G40.1, G41.1, G42.1) Tool ToolC-axisC-axisProgrammed path Normal direction (in which the tool moves) G41.1 ; Normal direction control on : right G42.1 ; Normal ...

  • Page 972

    APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 C. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT - 946 - Functions Illustration Program format T Synchronous, composite, and superimposed control by program command (G50.4, G51.4, G50.5, G51.5, G50.6, G51.6) G51.4 P_Q_(L_) ; Start synchronous control (L_ can be omitted.) G50.4 Q_...

  • Page 973

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX C.LIST OF FUNCTIONS ANDPROGRAM FORMAT- 947 - Functions Illustration Program format Custom macro (G65, G66, G67) G65 P_L_ ;MacroO_ ;M99 ;One-shot call G65 P_ L_ <Argument assignment> ; P : Program number L : Number of repetition Modal call G66 P_ L_ <Argumen...

  • Page 974

    APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 C. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND PROGRAM FORMAT - 948 - Functions Illustration Program format G73 A_ (B_) W_ U_ K_ H_ ; G74 P_ A_ (B_) W_ U_ K_ H_ ; M Electronic gear box (G81,G80) (G81.4,G80.4) Parameter EFX(No.7731#0) 0 0 Start of synchronizationG81 T_ (L_) (Q_ P_) ; G8...

  • Page 975

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX - 949 - C.LIST OF FUNCTIONS ANDPROGRAM FORMATFunctions Illustration Program format Constant surface speed control (G96, G97) Surface speed (m/min or feet/min)SpindlespeedN(min-1)G96 S_ ; Constant surface speed control on (surface speed specification) G97 S_ ; Constant sur...

  • Page 976

    D.RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 950 - D RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE Linear axis - In case of millimeter input, feed screw is millimeter Increment system IS-A IS-B IS-C Least input increment (mm) 0.01 0.001 0.0001 Least command increment (mm) 0.01 0.001 0.0001 Max. programmable dimen...

  • Page 977

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX D.RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE - 951 - - In case of millimeter input, feed screw is inch Increment system IS-A IS-B IS-C Least input increment (mm) 0.01 0.001 0.0001 Least command increment (mm) 0.01 0.001 0.0001 Max. programmable dimension (mm) ±999,999.99 ±999,999.999 ±99,9...

  • Page 978

    E.NOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 E NOMOGRAPHS Appendix E, "NOMOGRAPHS", consists of the following sections: .4 RADIUS DIRECTION ERROR AT CIRCLE CUTTING ...............................................................957 E E.1 INCORRECT THREADED LENGTH......................................

  • Page 979

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX E.NOMOGRAPHS When the value of “a” is determined, the time lapse until the thread accuracy is attained. The time “t” is substituted in (2) to determine δ1: Constants V and T1 are determined in the same way as for δ2. Since the calculation of δ1 is rather complex, ...

  • Page 980

    E.NOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - How to determine δ1 δ1= LR1800*( - 1 - lna) (mm) =δ2( - 1 - lna)(mm) R : Spindle speed (min-1) L : Thread lead (mm) * When time constant T1 of the servo system is 0.033 s. Following a is a permitted value of thread. a-1-lna0.0054.2980.010.0150.023.6053.2...

  • Page 981

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX E.NOMOGRAPHS E.3 TOOL PATH AT CORNER When servo system delay (by exponential acceleration/deceleration at cutting or caused by the positioning system when a servo motor is used) is accompanied by cornering, a slight deviation is produced between the tool path (tool center pa...

  • Page 982

    E.NOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 θVVX1VY1φ2VY2VX2φ2VZX0 Fig. E.3 (b) Example of tool path - Description of conditions and symbols VX1 = Vcos φ1 VY1 = Vsin φ1 VX2 = Vcos φ2 VY2 = Vsin φ2 V : Feedrate at both blocks before and after cornering VX1 : X-axis component of feedrate of p...

  • Page 983

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX E.NOMOGRAPHS T1 : Exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant. (T=0) T2 : Time constant of positioning system (Inverse of position loop gain) )TT(VXX2110+=)TT(VYY2110+= - Analysis of corner tool path The equations below represent the feedrate for the corner sect...

  • Page 984

    E.NOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 958 - YCommand pathActual path r Z Δr . . . . . (1) Δr : Maximum radius error (mm) v : Feedrate (mm/sec) r : Circle radius (mm) T1 : Exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant at cutting (sec) (T=0) T2 : Time constant of positioning system (sec...

  • Page 985

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX F.SETTINGS AT POWER-ON, IN THE CLEAR STATE, OR IN THE RESET STATE- 959 - F SETTINGS AT POWER-ON, IN THE CLEAR STATE, OR IN THE RESET STATE Either the clear state or reset state is entered during a reset is set by bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 (0: reset state/1: clear st...

  • Page 986

    APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 F. SETTINGS AT POWER-ON, IN THE CLEAR STATE, OR IN THE RESET STATE - 960 - Item Power-on Clear state Reset state CNC alarm signal AL "0”(when no alarm cause is present) “0” (when no alarm cause is present) “0” (when no alarm cause is present) Reference posi...

  • Page 987

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX - 961 - F.SETTINGS AT POWER-ON, IN THE CLEAR STATE, OR IN THE RESET STATENOTES 1 When the beginning position is found, the main program number is displayed. 2 If a reset is made during execution of a block, the states of the modal G code and modal address (such as N, F, S, ...

  • Page 988

    APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 G. CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE - 962 - G CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE Appendix G, "CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE", consists of the following sections: G.1 CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE ............................................

  • Page 989

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX G.CHARACTER-TO-CODESCORRESPONDENCE TABLEG.2 FANUC DOUBLE-BYTE CHARACTER CODE TABLE - 963 -

  • Page 990

    APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 G. CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE - 964 -

  • Page 991

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX G.CHARACTER-TO-CODESCORRESPONDENCE TABLE - 965 -

  • Page 992

    APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 G. CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE - 966 -

  • Page 993

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX G.CHARACTER-TO-CODESCORRESPONDENCE TABLE - 967 -

  • Page 994

    APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 968 - G. CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE

  • Page 995

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 969 - H ALARM LIST Appendix H, "ALARM LIST", consists of the following items: (1) Alarms on program and operation (PS alarm)................................................................................... 995,969 (2) Background edit alarms (BG al...

  • Page 996

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 970 - Number Message Description 0011 FEED ZERO ( COMMAND ) The cutting feedrate instructed by an F code has been set to 0. This alarm is also generated if the F code instructed for the S code is set extremely small in a rigid tapping instruction as the tool c...

  • Page 997

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 971 - Number Message Description 0031 ILLEGAL P COMMAND IN G10 Data input for the L No. of G10 or the corresponding function is not enabled. A data setting address such as P or R is not specified. An address command not concerned with data setting was specifie...

  • Page 998

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 972 - Number Message Description 0054 NO TAPER ALLOWED AFTER CHF/CNR T A block in which chamfering in the specified angle or the corner R was specified includes a taper command. Modify the program. 0055 MISSING MOVE VALUE IN CHF/CNR The travel distance specif...

  • Page 999

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 973 - Number Message Description 0069 LAST BLOCK OF SHAPE PROGRAM IS AN ILLEGAL COMMAND T In a shape program in the multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70, G71, G72, or G73), a command for the chamfering or corner R in the last block is terminated in the middl...

  • Page 1000

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 974 - Number Message Description 0080 G37 MEASURING POSITION REACHED SIGNAL IS NOT PROPERLY INPUT M When the tool length measurement function (G37) is performed, a measuring position reached signal goes 1 in front of the area determined by the ε value speci...

  • Page 1001

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 975 - Number Message Description 0090 REFERENCE RETURN INCOMPLETE 1) The reference position return cannot be performed normally because the reference position return start point is too close to the reference position or the speed is too slow. Separate the star...

  • Page 1002

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 976 - Number Message Description 0122 TOO MANY MACRO NESTING Too many macro calls were nested in a custom macro. 0123 ILLEGAL MODE FOR GOTO/WHILE/DO A GOTO statement or WHILE–DO statement was found in the main program in the MDI or DNC mode. 0124 MISSING END...

  • Page 1003

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 977 - Number Message Description 0146 ILLEGAL USE OF G-CODE T The G code must be G40 modal when the polar coordinate interpolation mode is set or canceled. An illegal G code was specified while in the polar coordinate interpolation mode. Only the following G ...

  • Page 1004

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 978 - Number Message Description 0175 ILLEGAL G07.1 AXIS An axis which cannot perform cylindrical interpolation was specified. More than one axis was specified in a G07.1 block. An attempt was made to cancel cylindrical interpolation for an axis that was not i...

  • Page 1005

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 979 - Number Message Description 0210 CAN NOT COMMAND M198/M99 1) The execution of an M198 or M99 command was attempted during scheduled operation. Alternatively, the execution of an M198 command was attempted during DNC operation. Modify the program. T 2) Th...

  • Page 1006

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 980 - Number Message Description 0233 DEVICE BUSY When an attempt was made to use a unit such as that connected via the RS-232-C interface, other users were using it. 0245 T-CODE NOT ALLOWED IN THIS BLOCK T One of the G codes, G04,G10,G28,G30,G50, and G53, wh...

  • Page 1007

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 981 - Number Message Description 0313 ILLEGAL LEAD COMMAND T The variable-lead threading increment specified in address K exceeds the specified maximum value in variable-lead threading. Or, a negative lead value was specified. 0314 ILLEGAL SETTING OF POLYGONA...

  • Page 1008

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 982 - Number Message Description 0326 LAST BLOCK OF SHAPE PROGRAM IS A DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS T In a shape program in the multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70, G71, G72, or G73), a command for direct input of drawing dimensions in the last block is termin...

  • Page 1009

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 983 - Number Message Description 0352 SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL AXIS COMPOSITION ERROR. T This error occurred when: 1) An attempt was made to perform synchronous control for the axis during a synchronization, composite, or superimposed control. 2) An attempt was ma...

  • Page 1010

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 984 - Number Message Description 0365 TOO MANY MAXIMUM SV/SP AXIS NUMBER PER PATH The Max. total number of control axes, the Max. number of feed axes or the Max. number of control axes is exceeded. Check parameter No. 0981 and No. 0982. If this alarm is gener...

  • Page 1011

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 985 - Number Message Description 0455 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN GRINDING In grinding canned cycles: M 1) The signs of the I, J, and K commands do not match. 2) The amount of travel of the grinding axis is not specified. 0456 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN GRINDING Paramet...

  • Page 1012

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 986 - Number Message Description 1099 ILLLEGAL SUFFIX [ ] A suffix was not specified to a variable name that required a suffix enclosed by [ ]. A suffix was specified to a variable name that did not require a suffix enclosed by [ ]. The value enclosed by the s...

  • Page 1013

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 987 - Number Message Description 1180 ALL PARALLEL AXES IN PARKING T All of the axis specified for automatic operation are parked. 1196 ILLEGAL DRILLING AXIS SELECTED An illegal axis was specified for drilling in a canned cycle for drilling. In the G code com...

  • Page 1014

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 988 - Number Message Description 1308 MISSING DATA An address not followed by a numeric value was found while loading parameters or pitch error compensation data from a tape. 1329 ILLEGAL MACHINE GROUP NUMBER An machine group No. address exceeding the maximum ...

  • Page 1015

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 989 - Number Message Description 1561 ILLEGAL INDEXING ANGLE M The specified angle of rotation is not an integer multiple of the minimum indexing angle. 1564 INDEX TABLE AXIS – OTHER AXIS SAME TIME M The index table indexing axis and another axis have be...

  • Page 1016

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 990 - Number Message Description 1806 DEVICE TYPE MISS MATCH An operation not possible on the I/O device that is currently selected in the setting was specified. This alarm is also generated when file rewind is instructed even though the I/O device is not a F...

  • Page 1017

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 991 - Number Message Description 2032 EMBEDDED ETHERNET/DATA SERVER ERROR An error was returned in the built-in Ethernet/data server function. For details, see the error message screen of the built-in Ethernet or data server. 2051 #200-#499ILLEGAL P-CODE MACRO...

  • Page 1018

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 992 - Number Message Description 5046 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (S-COMP) M The setting of a parameter related to simple straightness compensation contains an error. Possible causes include: 1) A non-existent axis number is set in a moving or compensation axis parame...

  • Page 1019

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 993 - Number Message Description 5257 G41/G42 NOT ALLOWED IN MDI MODE Tool radius/tool nose radius compensation was specified in MDI mode. (Depending on the setting of the parameter MCR (No. 5008#4)) 5303 TOUCH PANEL ERROR The touch panel is not connected corr...

  • Page 1020

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 994 - Number Message Description 5391 CAN NOT USE G92 M Workpiece coordinate system setting G92 cannot be specified. 1) After tool length compensation was changed by tool length compensation shift type, G92 was specified when no absolute command is present. ...

  • Page 1021

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 995 - Number Message Description SV0005 SYNC EXCESS ERROR (MCN) In feed axis control , for synchronization, the difference value of the machine coordinate between a master and slave axes exceeded the parameter (No. 8314) setting value. This alarm occurs for a ...

  • Page 1022

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 996 - Number Message Description SV0363 ABNORMAL CLOCK(INT) The clock alarm occurred on the built–in Pulsecoder. SV0364 SOFT PHASE ALARM(INT) A digital servo soft detected an abnormality on the built in Pulsecoder. SV0365 BROKEN LED(INT) The digital servo so...

  • Page 1023

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 997 - Number Message Description SV0417 ILL DGTL SERVO PARAMETER A digital serve parameter setting is incorrect. [When bit 4 of diagnosis information No. 203 is 1.] An illegal parameter was detected by the servo software. Identify the cause with reference to ...

  • Page 1024

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 998 - Number Message Description SV0444 INV. COOLING FAN FAILURE Servo Amplifier : Internal cooling fan failure. SV0445 SOFT DISCONNECT ALARM The digital servo software detected a disconnected Pulsecoder. SV0446 HARD DISCONNECT ALARM The hardware detected a di...

  • Page 1025

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 999 - Number Message Description SV0605 CNV. EX. DISCHARGE POW. Power Supply (PS) : The motor regenerative power is too much. SV0606 CNV. RADIATOR FAN FAILURE Power Supply (PS) : External radiator cooling fan failure. SV0607 CNV. SINGLE PHASE FAILURE Power Sup...

  • Page 1026

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1000 - Number Message Description OT0506 + OVERTRAVEL ( HARD ) The stroke limit switch in the positive direction was triggered. This alarm is generated when the machine reaches the stroke end. When this alarm is not generated, feed of all axes is stopped durin...

  • Page 1027

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 1001 - Number Message Description PW0003 PMC address is not correct(SPINDLE). The address to assign the spindle signal is incorrect. This alarm may occur in the following case: 1) The parameter No.3022 setting is incorrect. PW0006 POWER MUST BE OFF (ILL-EXEC-C...

  • Page 1028

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1002 - Number Message Description SP1225 CRC ERROR (SERIAL SPINDLE) A CRC error (communications error) occurred in communications between the CNC and the serial spindle amplifier. SP1226 FRAMING ERROR (SERIAL SPINDLE)A framing error occurred in communications ...

  • Page 1029

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 1003 - Number Message Description SP1996 ILLEGAL SPINDLE PARAMETER SETTING The spindle was assigned incorrectly. Alternatively, the number of spindles exceeded the maximum number allowed in the system. Check to see the following parameter. (No.3701#1,#4,#5, 37...

  • Page 1030

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1004 - Number Message Amplifier indication (*1) Faulty location and remedyDescription SP9006 THERMAL SENSOR DISCONNECT 06 1 Check and correct the parameter. 2 Replace the feedback cable. The temperature sensor of the motor is disconnected. SP9007 SSPA:07 OVER ...

  • Page 1031

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 1005 - Number Message Amplifier indication (*1) Faulty location and remedyDescription SP9018 SSPA:18 SUMCHECK ERROR PROGRAM ROM 18 Replace the Spindle Amplifier control printed circuit board. Abnormality in an Spindle Amplifier control circuit component is det...

  • Page 1032

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1006 - Number Message Amplifier indication (*1) Faulty location and remedyDescription SP9034 SSPA:34 ILLEGAL PARAMETER 34 Correct a parameter value according to the FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series PARAMETER MANUAL (B-65280EN). If the parameter number is unkn...

  • Page 1033

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 1007 - Number Message Amplifier indication (*1) Faulty location and remedyDescription SP9052 SSPA:52 ITP FAULT 1 52 1 Replace the Spindle Amplifier control printed circuit board. 2 Replace the main board or sub CPU board in the CNC.An abnormality is detected i...

  • Page 1034

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1008 - Number Message Amplifier indication (*1) Faulty location and remedyDescription SP9073 MOTOR SENSOR DISCONNECTED 73 1 Replace the feedback cable. 2 Check the shield processing.3 Check and correct the connection. 4 Adjust the sensor. The motor sensor feed...

  • Page 1035

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 1009 - Number Message Amplifier indication (*1) Faulty location and remedyDescription SP9110 AMP COMMUNICATION ERROR b0 1 Replace the communication cable between Spindle Amplifier and Power Supply (PS). 2 Replace the Spindle Amplifier or Power Supply (PS) cont...

  • Page 1036

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1010 - Error codes (serial spindle) NOTE *1 Note that the meanings of the Spindle Amplifier indications differ depending on which LED, the red or yellow LED, is on. When the yellow LED is on, an error code is indicated with a 2-digit number. When the red LED i...

  • Page 1037

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 1011 - Diagnosis indication(*1) Faulty location and remedy Description 12 A spindle synchronization command is input, but another mode (Cs contour control, servo mode, or orientation) is specified. Do not switch to another mode during a spindle synchronization...

  • Page 1038

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1012 - Number Message Description DS0006 ILLEGAL EXECUTION SEQUENCE The malfunction prevention function detected an illegal execution sequence. DS0007 ILLEGAL EXECUTION SEQUENCE The malfunction prevention function detected an illegal execution sequence. DS0008...

  • Page 1039

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 1013 - Number Message Description DS0025 G60 CANNOT BE EXECUTED M The state of a mirror image is different between the time when look-ahead of a block for unidirectional positioning was performed and the time when execution of the block was started, so unidi...

  • Page 1040

    H.ALARM LIST APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1014 - Number Message Description DS0309 APC ALARM: REF RETURN IMPOSSIBLE An attempt was made to set the zero point for the absolute position detector by MDI operation when it was impossible to set the zero point. Rotate the motor manually at least one turn, a...

  • Page 1041

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX H.ALARM LIST - 1015 - Number Message Description DS1512 EXCESS VELOCITY T The feedrate of the linear axis during polar coordinate interpolation exceeded the maximum cutting feedrate. DS1933 NEED REF RETURN(SYNC:MIX:OVL) T The relation between a machine coordinate of an axi...

  • Page 1042

    APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 I. PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING - 1016 - I PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING Appendix I, "PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING", consists of the following sections: I.1 PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM OPERATION/ED...

  • Page 1043

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX I.PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARDPROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING• Renaming a folder in the memory card program file • Deleting a folder in the memory card program file • Display of free space on the memory card program file • Sorting list view of the memory card program file I.1...

  • Page 1044

    APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 I. PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING • When "Open an existing file" is selected After OK button pushed, "Open" dialogue window is displayed. Please select the existing memory card program file. • When "Create a new file"...

  • Page 1045

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX I.PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARDPROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING During creating of the memory card program file, the progress bar is being displayed. The progress bar is also displayed during drag-in or drag-out. If you push [Cancel] button, the execution is stopped. - Menu File menu...

  • Page 1046

    APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 I. PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING [Rename] Rename a folder or file. NOTE For naming folder and program file, characters which can be used are limited. See "NAMING RULES" below. Option menu [Hide Confirm Message] When the following operati...

  • Page 1047

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX I.PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARDPROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING[Change Work Folder] When you select this option, you can set a work folder. By default, the [temp] folder is created in the folder that contains the executable file (FANUCPRG.exe), and [temp] is used as the work folder. ...

  • Page 1048

    APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 I. PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING Help menu [About...] Version number of this PC tool is displayed. - Mouse Operation [Drop-in and Drop-out] • Drag-in from the Explorer You can add NC programs by dragging in files. The NC program names and updat...

  • Page 1049

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX I.PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARDPROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING Based on the description in "RULES OF CHARACTERS IN PROGRAM FILE" below, this PC tool checks the characters in a file that has been dragged in. However, this PC tool does not check grammar of NC program. The pro...

  • Page 1050

    APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 I. PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING - Pop-up menu Pop-up menu is displayed by clicking the right mouse button. • Focus on Tree view Clicking "New Folder", a new folder is created on selected folder. Clicking "Delete", the select...

  • Page 1051

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX I.PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARDPROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING - Sorting list view of the memory card program file When a column is being clicked, the list view of the memory card program file is being sorted by the column key in ascending or descending order. The initial display is so...

  • Page 1052

    APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 I. PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING - 1026 - File name that prevents drag-in “O123456789” Numeric characters exceed 8 digits. NOTE 1 Program file name cannot be repeated in a Folder. 2 If program file name starts with "O" and the next eight...

  • Page 1053

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX - 1027 - I.PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARDPROGRAM OPERATION/EDITINGList of ANSI(ASCII) codes of usable characters(hexadecimal form) Code Character Code Character Code Character Code Character 2c , 46 F 62 b 2d - 47 G 63 c 2e . 48 H 64 d 2f / 49 I 65 e 30 0 4a J 66 f 31 1 ...

  • Page 1054

    APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1028 - I. PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARD PROGRAM OPERATION/EDITING I.4 ERROR MESSAGE AND NOTE Error may occur when using this application, hereafter explains the error messages and gives relative instructions. I.4.1 List of Error Message When an error occurred, the error messa...

  • Page 1055

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX - 1029 - I.PC TOOL FOR MEMORY CARDPROGRAM OPERATION/EDITINGI.4.2 Note - Folder and Program Numbers This PC tool allows you to select the number of folders or programs that can be stored in a memory card program file; you can select 63, 500, or 1000. The number of folders o...

  • Page 1056

    J.ISO/ASCII CODE CONVERSION TOOLAPPENDIX B-64304EN/02 J ISO/ASCII CODE CONVERSION TOOL Overview FANUC ISO Converter is a tool that converts a file created or externally output with ASCII code to ISO code format. This tool runs on Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Vista. This tool can be used ...

  • Page 1057

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIXJ.ISO/ASCII CODE CONVERSION TOOL GUI When you double-click the icon, the following screen appears, allowing you to select and convert a file. Conversion procedure 1. Step 1 In [Target File], specify a file you want to convert. When you click the [Select...▼] button, a fi...

  • Page 1058

    J.ISO/ASCII CODE CONVERSION TOOLAPPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1032 - 3. Step 3 When you specify the name of a converted file and click the [File Convert] button, the converted file is created. When the original file is an ASCII file, an ISO file is created; when the original is an ISO file, an ASCII fi...

  • Page 1059

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C - 1033 - K DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C Appendix K, "Differences from Series 0i-C", consists of the following sections: K.1 SETTING UNIT ...................................................................................................

  • Page 1060

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1034 - K.46 CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING ........................................................................................... 1126,1100 K.47 CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES)/MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES) ... 1128,1102 K.48 CANNED GRI...

  • Page 1061

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C K.2 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES)/AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T SERIES) M K.2.1 Automatic Tool Length Measurement (M Series) K.2.1.1 Differences in Specifications Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Operation of the current offset for t...

  • Page 1062

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1036 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Setting of the ε value - Set the value in parameter No. 6254. This is a parameter common to the measuring position reached signals (XAE, YAE, and ZAE). - Parameter No. 6254 This is a parameter for the ...

  • Page 1063

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C - 1037 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Setting of the γ value for the X axis - Set the value in parameter No. 6251.This is a parameter common to the measuring position reached signals (XAE and ZAE). - Parameter No. 6251 This is a parameter ...

  • Page 1064

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 K.3 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION K.3.1 Differences in Specifications Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D If the difference between the radius values of the start point and end point of an arc is greater than the value set in parameter No. 3410, alarm PS...

  • Page 1065

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C K.4 HELICAL INTERPOLATION K.4.1 Differences in Specifications Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Specification of the feedrate - Specify the feedrate along a circular arc. Therefore, the feedrate of the linear axis is as follows: Length ...

  • Page 1066

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1040 - K.5 SKIP FUNCTION K.5.1 Differences in Specifications Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D - Set 1 in bit 5 (SLS) of parameter No. 6200. - Set 1 in bit 4 (HSS) of parameter No. 6200. Setting to enable the high-speed skip signal for normal ...

  • Page 1067

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C - 1041 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Skip cutting feedrate (skip using the high-speed skip signal or multi-step skip) - Feedrate specified by the F code in the program - Depends on bit 2 (SFN) of parameter No. 6207. When 0 is set, the pro...

  • Page 1068

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1042 - K.6 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN K.6.1 Differences in Specifications Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Manual reference position return is performed when automatic operation is halted (feed hold) and when any of the following condit...

  • Page 1069

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C - 1043 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Behavior when manual reference position return is started on a rotation axis with the deceleration dog pressed before a reference position is established T - [When bit 0 (RTLx) of parameter No. 1007 =...

  • Page 1070

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 M Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D G28/G30 command in the coordinate system rotation, scaling, or programmable mirror image mode - Not available. Cancel the mode before executing the command. - The command can be executed only when all of the c...

  • Page 1071

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C - 1045 - K.8 LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM K.8.1 Differences in Specifications Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Clearing of the local coordinate system after servo alarm cancellation - The processing is determined by the settings of bit 5 (SNC) and ...

  • Page 1072

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 M Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Operation with the local coordinate system setting (G52) - Make a selection using bit 4 (G52) of parameter No. 1202. Bit 4 (G52) of parameter No. 1202 1) If there are two or more blocks that are not moved bef...

  • Page 1073

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C K.10 MULTI-SPINDLE CONTROL T K.10.1 Differences in Specifications Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Number of gear stages for each spindle - The first spindle has four stages. Set the maximum spindle speeds for the individual gears in paramete...

  • Page 1074

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 K.12 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL K.12.1 Differences in Specifications Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D - This is an optional function for the T series. It is not available with the M series. - This is a basic function for both M series and T...

  • Page 1075

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C - 1049 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Spindle positioning using the second spindle - Not available. - Spindle positioning using the second spindle is possible when multi-spindle control is enabled. Number of M codes for specifying the spind...

  • Page 1076

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 K.14 TOOL FUNCTIONS K.14.1 Differences in Specifications Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Specification of a G code of the 00 group other than G50 (T series) and a T code in the same block - Not allowed. - Not allowed. Specifying a G code in th...

  • Page 1077

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C - 1051 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Specification of the tool length compensation amount (Select the compensation amount number with H code.) - Depends on whether the order of compensation amount numbers specified by the H code is that of...

  • Page 1078

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 K.15 TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY K.15.1 Differences in Specifications Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Unit and range of tool compensation values - The unit and range of tool compensation values are determined by the setting unit. - Set the unit a...

  • Page 1079

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C - 1053 - Function Series 0i-TTC Series 0i-D Tool compensation memory sharing during 2-path control - Set this item using bit 5 (COF) of parameter No. 8100. All tool compensation memories can be shared by the paths. Note that it is not allowed...

  • Page 1080

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 K.17 CUSTOM MACRO K.17.1 Differences in Specifications Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D - The default value is <null>. - The default value is 0. Keep-type common variable (#500 to #999) - The Series 0i-D function (described at right) is n...

  • Page 1081

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C - 1055 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D When another NC command is found in a G65 block or in an M code block where a macro is called by an M code Example) G01 X100. G65 P9001 ; - In a program like the one shown in the example, G01 changes t...

  • Page 1082

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1056 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Subprogram and macro calls - The call nesting level differs as follows. Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Model Call method Independent nesting level Total Independent nesting level Total Macro call (G65/G66) 4 ...

  • Page 1083

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C - 1057 - K.19 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10) K.19.1 Differences in Specifications Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Parameter input mode setting - Specify G10 L50. - Specify G10 L52. K.19.2 Differences in Diagnosis Display None. K.20 ADVAN...

  • Page 1084

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1058 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Setting of acceleration for look-ahead linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation - Set acceleration by specifying the maximum cutting feedrate for linear acceleration/deceleration before int...

  • Page 1085

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C - 1059 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Setting of acceleration-based feedrate clamp (speed control with the acceleration on each axis) - Set the permissible acceleration by specifying the time to elapse before reaching the maximum cutting fe...

  • Page 1086

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1060 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Parameter 1 set by "permissible acceleration"(machining parameter adjustment screen) - The following parameters are set according to the precision level: [Parameter No. 1730] Upper limit of th...

  • Page 1087

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C - 1061 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Setting to perform synchronous operation all the time - Not available. - Depends on bit 5 (SCA) of parameter No. 8304 for the slave axis. When 0 is set, the processing is the same as Series 0i-C. Bit ...

  • Page 1088

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1062 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Synchronization error check based on positional difference T - Not available. M - The servo positional difference between the master and slave axes is monitored, and alarm PS0213 is issued if the di...

  • Page 1089

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C - 1063 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Maximum compensation for synchronization T - Synchronization establishment is not available. M - Set the value in parameter No. 8315 when the number of synchronized axis pairs is one or in parameter...

  • Page 1090

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1064 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Setting to use the external machine coordinate system shift function for the slave axis T - Not available. M - When 1 is set in bit 3 (SSE) of parameter No. 8302, setting an external machine coordin...

  • Page 1091

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C M Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Mirror image for the slave axis - A mirror image cannot be applied to a slave axis during simple synchronous control. It can be applied only to the T series. - By setting parameter No. 8312 for the slave axi...

  • Page 1092

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1066 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Reference position return completion signal ZP for the perpendicular axis moved with the angular axis <Fn094, Fn096, Fn098, Fn100> - Select the signal using bit 3 (AZP) of parameter No. 8200. When...

  • Page 1093

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C - 1067 - K.24.2 Differences in Diagnosis Display None. K.25 MANUAL HANDLE FEED K.25.1 Differences in Specifications Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D If manual handle feed exceeding the rapid traverse rate is specified, whether to ignore or ac...

  • Page 1094

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1068 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D - For parameter Nos. 7113, 7131, 7133, and 12350, magnification ranges from 1 to 127. For parameter Nos. 7114, 7132, 7134, and 12351, magnification ranges from 1 to 1000. - For parameter No. 7113, 7114,...

  • Page 1095

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C - 1069 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Relationship with the feed-forward and advanced preview feed-forward functions - Enable or disable the functions by using bit 7 (NAH) of parameter No. 1819, bit 3 (G8C) of parameter No. 8004, and bit 4 ...

  • Page 1096

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1070 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D The minimum unit of feedrate is given by the expressions shown below. The value must be specified as an integer. No finer value may be specified. A calculation is made according to IS-B. Fmin: Minimu...

  • Page 1097

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C - 1071 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Inch/metric conversion for a linear axis controlled only by PMC axis control - Depends on bit 0 (PIM) of parameter No. 8003. Bit 0 (PIM) of parameter No. 8003 When the axis controlled only by PMC axis ...

  • Page 1098

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1072 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Individual output of the auxiliary function - Depends on bit 7 (MFD) of parameter No. 8005. Bit 7 (MFD) of parameter No. 8005 The individual output of the auxiliary function for PMC axis control functi...

  • Page 1099

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C - 1073 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Operation when instructing in machine coordinate system selection (20h) to the axis to which roll-over is effective - Depends on bit 1 (RAB) of parameter No. 1008. Bit 1 (RAB) of parameter No. 1008 In ...

  • Page 1100

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1074 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D External subprogram call in MDI mode - Enabled. - Depends on bit 1 (MDE) of parameter No. 11630. Bit 1 (MDE) of parameter No. 11630 In MDI mode, an external device subprogram call (M198 command) is: 0:...

  • Page 1101

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C K.29 STORED STROKE CHECK K.29.1 Differences in Specifications Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D - This function is always enabled for all axes. - It is possible to select whether to enable or disable the function on an axis-by-axis basis using b...

  • Page 1102

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1076 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Operation continuation after automatic alarm cancellation when a soft OT1 alarm is issued during the execution of an absolute command in automatic operation - When the operation is resumed, the tool mov...

  • Page 1103

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C K.30 STORED PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION K.30.1 Differences in Specifications Function Explanation Value of parameter No. 3621 for the setting of a rotary axis (type A) 0.045.090.0 135.0180.0225.0270.0 315.0(68)(60)(67)(66)(65)(64)(63)(62)(61)(+)Re...

  • Page 1104

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1078 - K.31 SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION AND AUTOMATIC SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION K.31.1 Differences in Specifications Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Behavior of the manual screen erasure function ("<CAN> + function key") when an al...

  • Page 1105

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C - 1079 - K.32 RESET AND REWIND K.32.1 Differences in Specifications Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D - If reset occurs during the execution of a block, the states of the modal G codes and modal addresses (N, F, S, T, M, etc.) specified in that ...

  • Page 1106

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1080 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D - When the block intervened manually ends, the tool is at the position which shifts by manual intervention. (Fig.1) (Even incremental command and absolute command, the result is the same) - In case of i...

  • Page 1107

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C - 1081 - Function Series 0i-TTC Series 0i-D Parameter to enable the KEYP signal - Enable or disable the signal using bit 7 (PK5) of parameter No. 3292. This is a bit path parameter. - Enable or disable the signal using bit 0 (PKY) of parameter...

  • Page 1108

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1082 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Number of external operator messages and message length - Depends on bit 0 (OM4) of parameter No. 3207. Bit 0 (OM4) of parameter No. 3207 The external operator message screen can display: 0: Up to 256 ...

  • Page 1109

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C K.36 DATA SERVER FUNCTION K.36.1 Differences in Specifications Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Memory operation mode - The memory operation mode is not supported. - In the memory operation mode, the following operations can be performed for a ...

  • Page 1110

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 K.37.2 Differences in Diagnosis Display None. K.38 CHUCK/TAIL STOCK BARRIER (T SERIES) T K.38.1 Differences in Specifications Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Overtravel alarm - Bit 7 (BFA) of parameter No. 1300 is not supported. Therefore, i...

  • Page 1111

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C - 1085 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Retraction after chamfering - The specifications are as follows. [Acceleration/deceleration type] Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for threading is used. [Time constant] The time constant ...

  • Page 1112

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1086 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D - If the first axis of the plane is in a hypothetical axis direction relative to the center of the rotation axis, i.e. the center of the rotation axis is not on the X axis, the hypothetical axis directi...

  • Page 1113

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C K.41 PATH INTERFERENCE CHECK (T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL)) T K.41.1 Differences in Specifications Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Interference alarm - Bit 7 (BFA) of parameter No. 1300 is not supported. Therefore, if an interference alarm occur...

  • Page 1114

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1088 - Function Series 0i-TTC Series 0i-D Feed forward function and cutting/rapid traverse change function for synchronous and composite axes of another path - Make a selection using bit 1 (SVF) of parameter No. 8165. Bit 1 (SVF) of paramete...

  • Page 1115

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C - 1089 - Synchronous control Item Series 0i-TTC Series 0i-D G28 when the master axis is parking - When the reference position of the slave axis is not established, the machine coordinates are moved to the coordinates set in parameter No. 1240,...

  • Page 1116

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1090 - Item Series 0i-TTC Series 0i-D Composite control for the Cs contour axis reference position return command when composite control is exerted for Cs contour axes - Select whether to use the composite function of the Cs contour axis refe...

  • Page 1117

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C - 1091 - Item Series 0i-TTC Series 0i-D Machine coordinates during composite control - The coordinate values of the local path are displayed. - Make a selection using bit 0 (MDMx) of parameter No. 8169. Bit 0 (MDMx) of parameter No. 8169 The ma...

  • Page 1118

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1092 - Function Series 0i-TTC Series 0i-D Feed hold when an alarm occurs with respect to superimposed control - Both paths are placed in the feed hold state. - Make a selection using bit 0 (MPA) of parameter No. 8168. Bit 0 (MPA) of parameter...

  • Page 1119

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C K.43.2 Differences in Diagnosis Display None. K.44 Y AXIS OFFSET (T SERIES) T K.44.1 Differences in Specifications Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Number of the axis for which the Y axis offset is used - Make a selection using bit 7 (Y03) of...

  • Page 1120

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1094 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Single block stop position during the cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation mode - The single block stop position differs as shown below. Function to change the compensation d...

  • Page 1121

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C - 1095 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Single block stop in a block created internally for cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation - Not available. - Depends on bit 0 (SBK) of parameter No. 5000. Bit 0 (SBK) of parameter No. 5000 ...

  • Page 1122

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1096 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D - Set 1 in bit 0 (CNI) of parameter No. 5008. In the example below, an interference check is made on the vectors inside V1 and V4, and the interfering vectors are deleted. As a result, the tool center ...

  • Page 1123

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C - 1097 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D When circular interpolation is specified that causes the center to coincide with the start or end point during the cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation mode - Alarm PS0038 is issued, and th...

  • Page 1124

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1098 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D - Depends on bit 5 (QCR) of parameter No. 5008. - Bit 5 (QCR) of parameter No. 5008 is not available. The tool always behaves as when QCR is set to 1. [When QCR = 0] [When QCR = 1 or for Se...

  • Page 1125

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C - 1099 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D - [Outer surface turning/boring cycle (G90)] - [Edge cutting cycle (G94)] - [Outer surface turning/boring cycle (G90)] - [Edge cutting cycle (G94)] ...

  • Page 1126

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 K.46 CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING K.46.1 Differences in Specifications Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D M05 output in a tapping cycle - Make a selection using bit 6 (M5T) of parameter No. 5101. Bit 6 (M5T) of parameter No. 5101 When the rotation ...

  • Page 1127

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C T Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Retraction in a boring cycle (G85, G89) - Select the retraction operation using bit 1 (BCR) of parameter No. 5104. Bit 1 (BCR) of parameter No. 5104 The retraction operation in a boring cycle is performed: at...

  • Page 1128

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 K.46.2 Differences in Diagnosis Display None. K.47 CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES)/MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES) T K.47.1 Differences in Specifications Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Machining plane - The plane on which the canned cyc...

  • Page 1129

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C K.48 CANNED GRINDING CYCLE K.48.1 Differences in Specifications Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Grinding axis specification T - The grinding axis is always the Z axis. M - The grinding axis is the X or Z axis. - Set the grinding axes for ...

  • Page 1130

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 K.48.2 Differences in Diagnosis Display None. K.49 MULTIPLE RESPECTIVE CANNED CYCLE FOR TURNING (T SERIES) T K.49.1 Differences in Specifications Differences common to the Series 0 standard format and Series 10/11 format Function Series 0i-C ...

  • Page 1131

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C - 1105 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Monotonous increase/decrease check in G71/G72 type I (multiple respective canned cycle for turning) - Depends on bit 1 (MRC) of parameter No. 5102. Bit 1 (MRC) of parameter No. 5102 When any target fig...

  • Page 1132

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1106 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D G70 to G76 commands during the tool nose radius compensation mode - [G70 command] Tool nose radius compensation is performed. [G71 to G73 commands] While tool nose radius compensation is not performed, ...

  • Page 1133

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C Differences regarding the Series 0 standard format Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Pocketing path in G71/G72 type II (multiple respective canned cycle for turning II) - The tool moves from one pocket to another for each cut. (The numbers in th...

  • Page 1134

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1108 - Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Number of divisions in G73 - The number of divisions is also 2 for the D1 command. For D2 and subsequent commands, the number of divisions specified by D applies. - The number of divisions specified by...

  • Page 1135

    B-64304EN/02 APPENDIX K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C K.51 DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING (T SERIES) T K.51.1 Differences in Specifications Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Specification of the direct drawing dimension programming command for a plane other than the Z-X plane - P/S alarm No...

  • Page 1136

    K.DIFFERENCES FROM SERIES 0i-C APPENDIX B-64304EN/02 - 1110 - K.53 OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (M SERIES) M K.53.1 Differences in Specifications Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D Optional angle chamfering and corner rounding commands for a plane including a parallel axis - Not a...

  • Page 1137

    B-64304EN/02 INDEX i-1 INDEX <Number> 10.4” LCD....................................................................319 8.4” LCD/MDI .............................................................318 <A> ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING..............................................

  • Page 1138

    INDEX B-64304EN/02 i-2 CREATING PROGRAMS USING THE MDI PANEL478 Cs CONTOUR CONTROL........................................1046 Current Block Display Screen (Only for the 8.4-Inch Display Unit) ............................................................563 Current Position Display .................

  • Page 1139

    B-64304EN/02 INDEX i-3 FEED FUNCTIONS ......................................................52 Feed per Revolution .....................................................121 FEED-FEED FUNCTION .............................................11 FEEDRATE INSTRUCTION ON IMAGINARY CIRCLE FOR A ROTARY AXI...

  • Page 1140

    INDEX B-64304EN/02 i-4 Macro Call Using a G Code (Specification of Multiple Definitions)...............................................................218 Macro Call Using an M Code ......................................218 Macro Call Using an M Code (Specification of Multiple Definitions).........

  • Page 1141

    B-64304EN/02 INDEX i-5 PROGRAM SECTION CONFIGURATION...............148 Programmable Data Input (G10) for Blank Figure Drawing Parameters .................................................737 Programmable Data Input (G10) for Tool Figure Drawing Parameters ............................................

  • Page 1142

    INDEX B-64304EN/02 i-6 SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL (T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL)) ..........................................................1091 SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL AND COMPOSITE CONTROL (T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL)) ....1087 Synchronous Error Check ............................................273 Synchronou...

  • Page 1143

    Revision Record FANUC Series 0i-MODEL D/Series 0i Mate-MODEL D OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) (B-64304EN) 02 Aug., 2010Total revision 01 Jun., 2008 Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents

  • Page 1144

x